Mercedes-Benz 2001 ML-Class Operator`s manual

ML 350
ML 500
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully,
then return it to your vehicle where it
will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees
of Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 13
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 15
Symbols............................................... 16
Operating safety .................................. 17
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17
Problems with your vehicle.................. 18
Reporting safety defects...................... 19
Reporting safety defects ................ 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Cockpit................................................. 22
Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Center console ..................................... 27
Upper part ...................................... 27
Lower part ...................................... 28
Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Getting started ................................... 31
Unlocking ............................................. 32
Remote control with folding key ..... 32
Adjusting .............................................. 34
Seats............................................... 34
Steering wheel ................................ 39
Mirrors ............................................ 40
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Rear window wiper .........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off engine...........................
42
42
46
48
49
49
51
51
53
53
54
54
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Airbags ...........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear door
window operation...........................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving and safety systems ..................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
4-ETS..............................................
EBP.................................................
ESP.................................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm ..............................
Tow-away alarm,
glass breakage sensor....................
57
58
59
64
67
73
75
75
75
76
76
78
79
80
80
83
83
83
84
Controls in detail ............................... 87
Locking and unlocking ......................... 88
Remote control with folding key..... 88
Opening the doors
from the inside ............................... 90
Opening the liftgate ....................... 91
Closing the liftgate ......................... 92
Automatic central locking .............. 93
Locking and unlocking
from the inside ............................... 94
Seats ................................................... 95
Removing and installing
front seat head restraints............... 95
Rear seat head restraints ............... 96
Heated seats* ................................ 98
Rear seats ...................................... 99
Third row seats* .......................... 102
Memory function* ............................. 105
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 105
Storing positions in memory ........ 106
Recalling positions from memory . 106
Lighting .............................................
Combination switch .....................
Fog lamps ....................................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature gauge .........
Display in the speedometer .........
Resetting trip odometer ...............
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
Setting the clock..........................
Automatic transmission.....................
One-touch gearshifting ................
Gear ranges .................................
Gear selector lever position .........
Accelerator position.....................
Towing a trailer ............................
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
107
107
111
112
112
116
116
117
117
118
118
118
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
124
Contents
Transmission control –
LOW RANGE mode.............................
Switching on LOW RANGE mode..
Switching off LOW RANGE mode .
Good visibility ....................................
Rear view mirror...........................
Electrically folding exterior
rear view mirrors..........................
Windshield wipers ........................
Headlamp cleaning system* ........
Rear window wiper.......................
Sun visor ......................................
Rear window defroster .................
Automatic climate control .................
Automatic mode...........................
Adjusting air volume and
air distribution manually...............
Defrosting ....................................
Air recirculation mode..................
Air conditioning............................
Residual heat and ventilation .......
Rear passenger compartment
ventilation and rear automatic
climate control.............................
Front and rear air vents................
125
125
125
126
126
128
129
131
131
132
133
134
137
137
138
138
139
140
141
142
Power windows .................................. 144
Opening and closing
the side windows .......................... 144
Synchronizing power windows ...... 146
Rear quarter windows* ................. 146
Sliding/pop-up roof* ......................... 148
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 148
Synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 149
Driving systems .................................. 150
Cruise control ............................... 150
Parktronic system*
(Parking assist) ............................. 153
Loading............................................... 157
Loading instructions ..................... 157
Partition net* ................................ 159
Cargo area cover blind*................ 161
Cargo floor plates ......................... 162
Roof rack* .................................... 163
Useful features................................... 164
Interior storage spaces................. 164
Cup holders .................................. 166
Armrest in rear seat bench ........... 167
Ashtrays and cigarette lighter....... 168
Electrical outlet............................. 170
Telephone* ................................... 170
Tele Aid*....................................... 171
Garage door opener...................... 180
Trip computer* ............................. 186
Contents
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel .............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes ..........................................
Driving off.....................................
Parking .........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning ................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water .............................
Off-road driving ............................
Trailer towing ...............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation of
radio transmitters.........................
Catalytic converter .......................
Emission control...........................
Coolant temperature ....................
191
192
193
193
193
193
193
194
195
196
196
197
197
198
198
200
200
206
211
211
211
212
212
213
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip.....................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level ................
Coolant ........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tire.....................................
Direction of rotation.....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels ...........................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater (Canada only) ..........
Snow chains.................................
214
214
215
217
217
218
222
222
223
224
226
226
227
227
227
228
230
230
231
231
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the service indicator ......
Service term exceeded ................
Calling up the service indicator....
Resetting the service indicator ....
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..
232
232
233
233
233
234
234
Practical hints .................................
What to do if … ..................................
Lamps in instrument cluster ........
Additional indicators in the
speedometer display....................
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit...................................
Vehicle tool kit .............................
Spare wheel (space-saver tire).....
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Locking the vehicle ......................
Changing batteries in the
remote control .............................
Fuel filler flap ...............................
Manually unlocking the
transmission gear selector lever ..
241
242
242
256
257
257
257
259
261
261
262
262
263
264
Contents
Opening/closing in an emergency ....
Sliding/pop-up roof*...................
Replacing bulbs .................................
Bulbs ............................................
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ...
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps.....
Adjusting headlamp aim...............
Replacing wiper blades......................
Removing .....................................
Installing ......................................
Flat tire ..............................................
Mounting the spare wheel............
Battery...............................................
Disconnecting the battery............
Removing the batteries ................
Charging and reinstalling
batteries.......................................
Reconnecting the batteries ..........
Jump starting .....................................
Towing the vehicle .............................
Front towing eye ..........................
Rear towing eye ...........................
Stranded vehicle ..........................
265
265
266
266
268
270
272
273
273
273
274
274
278
279
279
279
279
281
283
285
285
286
Fuses.................................................. 287
Fuse box in engine
compartment ................................ 287
Auxiliary fuse box in front
passenger footwell........................ 288
Technical data .................................. 289
Spare parts service............................. 290
Warranty coverage ............................. 291
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ...................... 291
Identification labels ............................ 292
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 293
Engine ................................................ 294
Rims and tires .................................... 295
Rims and tires............................... 295
Spare wheel .................................. 296
Electrical system ................................ 297
Main Dimensions................................ 298
Weights .............................................. 299
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc............ 300
Capacities..................................... 300
Engine oils .................................... 302
Engine oil additives....................... 302
Air conditioning refrigerant........... 302
Brake fluid .................................... 302
Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 303
Fuel requirements......................... 303
Gasoline additives......................... 303
Coolants ....................................... 304
Anticorrosion/antifreeze.............. 305
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system* ......... 307
Windshield and headlamp
washer fluid mixing ratio............... 307
Consumer information........................ 308
Uniform tire quality grading .......... 308
Temperature ................................. 309
Technical terms ............................... 311
Index ................................................. 317
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical
modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
왔 Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper
procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty,
앫
Emission Performance Warranty,
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center will be glad to inform
you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for service. The service advisor will record
each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guidelines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, however, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center technician or the tow service provider on a
case-by-case basis and may be a factor in
our ability to respond.
12
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
determined by our authorized technician
and tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your glove box.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Warning!
G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you
make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
14
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color so you can find
information quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
16
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to
electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance
or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If
the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management,
or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Center console
Overhead control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
왔 Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Hood lock release
Page
217
2 Parking brake pedal
53
3 Parking brake release
53
4 Left cup holder
5 Combination switch
앫
Exterior lights
앫
High beam
앫
Turn signals
166
49
Item
Page
a Windshield wiper/washer
switch
49
b Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
155
c Glove box
164
d Right cup holder
166
e Storage compartment
f Electrical outlet
6 Cruise control lever
150
7 Instrument cluster
116
8 Hazard warning flasher
switch
112
170
g Horn
h Headlamp washer button*
131
j Steering lock with ignition
33
k Steering wheel lever
39
9 Lever for voice control
system*, see separate
operating instructions
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
1 Gauge for
Coolant temperature
117
Outside temperature
118
Fuel reserve
warning lamp
252
2 Knob for
Activating instrument cluster
116
Adjusting intensity
of instrument lamps
116
Main odometer
117
Trip odometer
readout/reset
118
Activating Flexible
Service System
(FSS) indicator
232
Item
Page
3 Left indicator lamps
with:
¿ Brake Assist
System
(BAS)/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP) malfunction
warning lamp
246
{ Electronic Traction
System (4-ETS) malfunction indicator
lamp
252
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction warning lamp
242
2 Brake pad wear indicator lamp
254
: Low engine oil level
warning lamp
253
Item
Page
/ Low engine coolant
level warning lamp
249
ê Low range indicator
lamp
252
? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
248
4 Speedometer with:
v 4-ETS (Electronic
Traction
System)/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP) warning lamp
251
Trip/main
odometer
117
Display for Flexible
Service System
(FSS)
232
Engine oil level indicator
219
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
Item
Page
Item
Page
5 Photo sensor
(adjusts the brightness of
the digital displays located
in 1, 4 and 8)
_ Steering wheel adjustment not locked
253
< Seat belt non-usage
warning lamp
253
121
6 Right indicator lamps
with:
Display for Selector
lever position
1 Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) indicator
lamp
255
Clock
118
É Brake warning lamp
244
26
7 Knob for setting clock
118
8 Tachometer with:
9 K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
W Low windshield/headlamp
washer system fluid
level warning lamp
253
7 Front passenger airbag switched off
243
# Charge indicator
lamp
254
‡ Front fog lamp
switched on
111
A High beam headlamp indicator
49
a L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
1 Air vents, automatic
climate control
Page
142
2 MCS, see separate
operating instructions
3 Automatic climate control
134
Rear window defroster
switch
133
4 Seat heater switch*,
passenger side
98
5 Rear quarter window
switch*, right
6 ESP control switch
Item
Page
7 Rear window
wiper/washer switch
51
8 Rear quarter window
switch*, left
146
9 Seat heater switch*,
driver’s side
98
a Front and rear fog lamp
switch
111
83
146
b Indicator lamp for antitheft
alarm system
125
80
c Transmission control
switch, LOW RANGE mode
27
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
28
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Ashtray with cigarette
lighter
168
7 Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment switch
40
2 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
46
Exterior rear view mirror
electrically folding*
128
3 Power window switch, right
front door
144
8 Central locking switch
93
144
9 Power window switch, left
rear door
144
4 Power window switch, right
rear door
156
a Switch for rear door window override
73
5 Parktronic system*
deactivation switch
166
b Power window switch, left
front door
144
6 Storage compartment with
cup holder
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Front left interior lighting
112
8 Right reading lamp on/off
114
2 Signal transmitter buttons
for garage door opener
180
9 Automatic antiglare function* on/off
126
3 Front right interior lighting
112
a Left reading lamp on/off
114
4 Roadside Assistance
button
175
b Glass breakage sensor
84
c Trip computer* control
186
Tow-away alarm switch
85
Information button
177
5 Interior lighting control
112
6 Trip computer* display
186
7 Rear view mirror
126
d Tele Aid* (emergency call
system) button
171
e Sliding/pop-up roof*
switch
148
29
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
31
Getting started
Unlocking
왔 Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Remote control with folding key
Press unlock button Πon the remote control.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
왘
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.
Press release button 4 on the remote
control.
The key folds out.
왘
Remote control with folding key
1 Â Panic button (컄 page 75)
2 ΠUnlock button
3 ‹ Lock button
4 Release button for key
5 Š Unlock button for liftgate
32
왘
Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the steering lock (컄 page 33).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 88).
Getting started
Unlocking
Steering lock positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
0 For removing key
The steering is locked when the key is
removed from the steering lock. If
necessary, move steering wheel
slightly to allow the locking mechanism
to engage.
1 Unlocking steering
Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment.
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
!
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the key from the steering
lock when the engine is not in operation.
i
The key can only be withdrawn in
position 0.
If necessary, move steering wheel
slightly to allow the key to be turned
clockwise to position 1.
A warning sounds when the driver’s
door is opened and the key is in steering lock position 0 or 1.
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector lever in position P.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Seats
The seats can be adjusted either manually
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s
equipment.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
The seat back and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be
adjusted so that you can correctly fasten
your seat belt (컄 page 42).
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck.
34
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Warning!
Warning!
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your
vehicle.
The power seats* can also be operated with
the appropriate door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Adjusting
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Manual seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Lift handle 1.
왘
Slide seat to the desired position.
왘
Allow handle 1 to reengage.
왘
Check for proper seat engagement
before driving.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Backrest tilt
3 Seat height
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Head restraint height
Warning!
Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward until your hands are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Seat height
왘
Lift handle 3.
왘
Use your body weight to push the seat
downwards.
왘
Lift your weight off the seat to obtain a
higher seat position.
왘
Release lever 3.
1 Release button
Raising:
왘
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
왘
36
G
To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and press down on
the head restraint.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt
Power seat* adjustment
왘
The seat adjustment switch is located on
the entry side of each front seat base.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
i
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More information on seats can be found in
the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 95).
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 1.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far to the rear
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
왘
Open the driver’s or passenger door.
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
1 Backrest tilt
2 Seat fore and aft adjustment
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat height
왘
The memory function* (컄 page 105)
lets you store the setting for the seat
positions together with the setting for
the exterior rear view mirrors.
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (컄 page 33).
or
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Head restraint height
Warning!
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 1 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 4.
1 Release button
Raising:
왘
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
왘
38
G
To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and press down on
the head restraint.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt
Steering wheel
Warning!
Steering wheel adjustment
G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
왘
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More informations on seats can be found
in the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 95).
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
1 Lever
왘
To unlock the steering column, move
lever 1 to its stop down.
왘
Move steering wheel to the desired position.
왘
To lock the steering column, move
lever 1 to its stop up.
The steering wheel is once again
locked into position.
39
Getting started
Adjusting
!
Do not drive the vehicle until you have
properly locked the steering column.
If the indicator lamp _ (컄 page 26)
comes on while the engine is running,
the steering column is not locked properly.
Mirrors
Interior rear view mirror
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
40
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are on the lower part of the
center console.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror
3 Adjustment button
왘
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2
(컄 page 33).
i
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
With the front doors closed, the exterior mirrors can still be adjusted for approximately 30 minutes after the
ignition has been switched off.
왘
Press button 1 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.
i
왘
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
The memory function* (컄 page 105)
lets you save the exterior mirror settings together with the seat and
steering wheel settings.
!
For information on how to reposition
the exterior mirror housing when it was
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front), see “Folding exterior
mirrors in and out manually*”
(컄 page 128).
i
At low outside temperatures, the exterior mirrors will be automatically
heated.
For more information, see “Electrically
folding exterior rear view mirrors”
(컄 page 128).
41
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄 page 58).
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
1
42
G
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Driving
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
G
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 62) and (컄 page 64).
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
4 Seat belt outlet
43
Getting started
Driving
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from seat belt outlet 4.
왘
Place the belt over your shoulder.
왘
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until
it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
왘
앫
앫
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it
should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).
44
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
앫
Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Proper use of seat belts:
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Warning!
앫
If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
correct height (컄 page 45).
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Getting started
Driving
Seat belt height adjustment
Adjusting seat belt higher
Seat belt height can be adjusted for the following seats:
왘
앫
Driver’s seat
앫
Passenger seat
앫
Outer rear seats
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the
middle of the shoulder (it should not touch
the neck or pass under the arm).
Slide belt outlet upward.
The belt outlet engages in various positions.
Adjusting seat belt lower
1 Release button
왘
Press and hold release button 1.
왘
Slide belt outlet in desired position and
let go of release button 1.
45
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
Warning!
Automatic transmission
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 33).
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 119).
46
Starting
For information on turning off the engine,
see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 54).
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
Turn key in starter to position 0 and repeat starting procedure.
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 281).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
왘
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 2.
The indicator lamp É in the instrument cluster goes out.
Driving
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position D or R.
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Release handle
47
Getting started
Driving
!
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
!
Place the gear selector lever in
position R only when the vehicle is
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
transmission.
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
More information can be found in the “Operation” section (컄 page 191).
For information on off-road driving, see
“Driving instructions” (컄 page 200).
48
Switching on headlamps
Combination switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
3 High beam lamps on
왘
Turn the switch to õ.
Low beam headlamps on.
Getting started
Driving
High beam
왘
Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam indicator A in the
instrument cluster comes on.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 110).
Turn signals
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The switch is automatically cancelled
when the steering wheel is turned to a
large enough degree.
Windshield wipers
The wiper switch is located on the right of
the steering column.
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
Wiper switch
0 Windshield wipers off
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Normal wiper speed
3 Fast wiper speed
4 Wiping with windshield wiper fluid
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
49
Getting started
Driving
!
Switching on windshield wipers
!
Vehicles with rain sensor*:
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
왘
Turn the wiper switch to the desired position 1, 2 or 3, depending on the
intensity of the rain.
If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
For safety reasons, withdraw key
from steering lock before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
Single wipe
왘
Press wiper switch briefly in the direction of arrow 2.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Pull and hold wiper switch in direction
of arrow 4.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section (컄 page 224).
50
앫
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position 1,
앫
set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
Getting started
Driving
Rear window wiper
The button is on the upper part on the center console.
Switching on intermittent wiping
Problems while driving
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press upper half 1 of the button.
Switching off intermittent wiping
왘
Press upper half 1 of the button
again.
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Wiping with washer fluid
왘
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Indicator lamp
3 Wiping with washer fluid
Press and hold lower half 3 of the button.
After releasing the button the wiper operates for additional five seconds.
More information on windshield wipers can
be found in the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 129).
51
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 222).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
52
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the key from the steering lock. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is
removed.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove.
앫
Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.
1 Parking brake
2 Release handle
왘
Step firmly on parking brake 1.
When the engine is running, the indicator lamp É in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake and/or move the gear selector lever
from position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
G
Turning off engine
왘
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 53).
When parked on an incline, also turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
왘
Turn the key in the steering lock
(컄 page 33) to position 0 and remove
it.
Switching off headlamps
The immobilizer is activated.
왘
i
Turn the combination switch to 1
(컄 page 48).
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector lever in position P.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 107).
왘
54
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
Move the steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 42).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
i
With the key removed and the driver’s
door open, a warning sounds if the vehicles exterior lamps are not switched
off.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, ensure that there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
왘
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button ‹ on the remote control
(컄 page 32).
The turn signal lamps flash three times
and the locking knobs on the doors
move down.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
More information on parking and locking
can be found in the “Controls in detail”
section (컄 page 88).
55
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving and safety systems
Anti-theft systems
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왔 Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts
앫
Emergency tensioning device
앫
Airbags
앫
Child seat
앫
Child seat recognition
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)
As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each
other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 67).
58
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 26) comes on for about
four seconds when you turn the key in the
steering lock to position 2. It goes out
when you start the engine. This shows that
the restraint systems are operational.
If the lamp does not come on at all or if it
fails to extinguish after approximately four
seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a malfunction in the system has been detected.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 255).
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 malfunction indicator lamp comes on during driving or does
not come at all, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
be activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury and fatality in certain frontal (front
airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and
head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which may cause significant injuries.
However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
G
앫
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
앫
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat
belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body (컄 page 42).
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat backrest.
59
컄컄
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
1
앫
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side impact airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit upright, properly
use the seat belts and appropriate size
infant or child restraint system.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s
Manual.
앫
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
60
Warning
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag
(컄 page 70). BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door
where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the
side airbag be activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and use an
appropriately sized infant or child restraint
system for all children 12 years old or under;
and (3) always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear door
mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your
written election to do so at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or call our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
for details.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,
or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts
which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning
앫
앫
62
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cover, or door trim panels, and installation
of additional electrical/electronic
equipment on or near SRS components
and wiring. Keep area between airbags
and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.
앫
An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫
Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
앫
In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving, the SRS
may not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated
when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in injury.
Front airbags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front airbag will only be
deployed if:
1 Driver airbag
2 Passenger front airbag
3 Side impact airbag
Driver and passenger front airbags are
deployed:
앫
in the event of a frontal impact
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact airbags
앫
the passenger seat is occupied
앫
the 7 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is not lit (컄 page 26)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system's deployment threshold.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags
The front passenger side impact airbag will
only deploy if the system senses that the
front passenger seat is occupied.
The side impact airbags and window
curtain airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
deployment threshold.
Seat belts
1 Window curtain airbags
2 Side impact airbag, rear
3 Side impact airbag, front
The side impact airbags and window
curtain airbags are deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front airbags
64
When the engine is started, the seat belt
non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
to remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened before the engine is
started, the seat belt non-usage warning
lamp < illuminates and a warning
chime sounds for approximately
six seconds when the engine is started.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states and all Canadian provinces. Even
where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened
whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 42).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 67).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
앫
66
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag,
front passenger airbag, front and rear
door mounted side impact airbags and
window curtain airbags), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device for the
outboard passenger seats [except in the
optional third row seats]), and front seat
knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants
in certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact airbags and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
앫
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device, seat belt
force limiter
The seat belts for the front seats are
equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters. The outboard
passenger seats belts (except in the third
row seats*) are equipped with emergency
tensioning devices.
The ETD is designed to activate only when
the seat belt is fastened and in the following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 58)
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM1
i
compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 71).
We recommend that all infants and
children be properly restrained at all times
while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have
special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints.
For information on child seat anchors –
LATCH type (컄 page 72).
To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During the seat belt retraction a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
68
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and 210.2. A statement
by the child restraint manufacturer of
compliance with this standard can be
found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual
provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM System installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury can result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
Warning!
Special BabySmartTM1 compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center, are required for use with the
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
With the special seat properly installed,
the passenger front airbag will not deploy.
After turning the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster comes on
for approximately six seconds, extinguishes, then flashes once.
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before
seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
The 7 indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster will be illuminated, except with the key removed or in steering
lock position 0 (컄 page 33).
i
The system does not deactivate the
door mounted side impact airbag, the
window curtain airbags and the emergency tensioning device.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
70
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 243).
G
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
Warning!
Installation of infant and child restraint
system
왘
Guide top tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back. Head
restraint must be installed and positioned such that the top tether strap
can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back.
G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
passenger seat. Signals from such devices
may interfere with the BabySmartTM system.
Such signal interference may cause the
7 indicator lamp not to come on during
self-test or be continuously lit, indicating
that the system is not functioning.
Vehicle without third row seats
3 Anchorage rings for second row seats
4 Anchorage rings for third row seats*
This vehicle is provided with three tether
anchorages 3 for a top tether strap behind the second row seats.
!
1 Hook
2 Anchorage ring
왘
Securely fasten the hook 1 to the anchorage ring 2.
Do not use the tether anchorages 4
for a top tether strap on a second row
seat.
For safety, make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Vehicle with third row seats*
앫
앫
3 Anchorage rings for second row seats
4 Anchorage rings for third row seats*
This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top tether strap behind the
second row seats 3 and the third row
seats 4.
When using the third row observe the
following:
앫
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems with a top tether strap is allowed only on both third row seats plus
the center second row seat.
72
When using the center second row seat
for a top tether strap, the left third row
seat should only be used for a child restraint system, since exiting the vehicle
may not be possible in an emergency
due to the routing of the top tether
strap.
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a LATCH child seat with
matching anchor fittings.
When installing an infant or child restraint system with a top tether strap
on the left second row seat, the left
third row seat should not be occupied.
!
An infant and child restraint system
must not be installed on the right
second row seat while a passenger
rides in a third row seat. An infant and
child restraint system installed on the
right second row seat will prevent the
use of the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 101).
1 Anchors
왘
Install a LATCH type child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
With a child seat installed in the left
rear seat, the seat belt for the center
seat occupied by a passenger must operate freely. Guide seat belt between
its seat cushion mount and backrest
mount along outside of right side child
seat mount.
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Warning!
G
Blocking of rear door window operation
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 1 (컄 page 72).
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
1 Switch for rear door window override
왘
Slide the switch to the right.
A dot becomes visible. The rear windows can no longer be operated using
the switch in the rear doors.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
For more information on power windows,
see the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 144).
74
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing turn signal
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
Activating
왘
Press and hold button 1 for at least
one second.
Deactivating
왘
1 Â button
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
앫
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Press button 1 again.
or
왘
i
Insert key in steering lock.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
75
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
왔 Driving and safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
ABS
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
Warning!
앫
앫
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires)
or snow chains as required.
ABS, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
G
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 25) comes on when you
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when
the engine is running.
76
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Braking
Emergency brake maneuver
LOW RANGE– ABS
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
왘
During off-road driving, a special low range
system for the ABS is operational with
transmission in LOW RANGE mode
(컄 page 125).
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
i
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS,
the EBP, ESP, and the 4-ETS are also
switched off.
Normal driving and braking functions
are still available.
When applying the service brakes at
speeds below approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are
locked cyclically to shorten the braking
distance (dig-in effect). This affects steering the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
77
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
For more information, see “The yellow ABS
warning lamp comes on while driving.”
(컄 page 242).
78
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance. Apply continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
The ¿ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 25) comes on when you
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when
the engine is running.
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see “The yellow
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.” (컄 page 246).
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
4-ETS
Warning!
The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
improves vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery
road conditions. The brakes are applied to
the spinning wheel and power is transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
G
When you see the 4-ETS/ESP-warning
lamp v flashing in the speedometer,
then proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
The traction control engages at vehicle
speeds up to approximately 24 mph
(40 km/h), and switches off at approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
While driving ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
The { indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 25) comes on when you
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when
the engine is running.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash
at any vehicle speed, as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
i
If the yellow 4-ETS malfunction indicator lamp { comes on while the
4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v flashes, the electronic traction system is being switched off temporarily to prevent
overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
79
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
LOW RANGE 4-ETS
During off-road driving, a special low range
system for the 4-ETS is operational with
transmission in LOW RANGE mode.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 242) and
(컄 page 252).
EBP
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
greater proportion of the braking effort
without a loss of vehicle stability.
ESP
Warning!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes when the ESP is engaged.
The ¿ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 25) and the 4-ETS/ESP
warning lamp v in the speedometer
come on when you turn the key to
position 2. They go out when the engine is
running.
80
G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
4-ETS/ESP-warning lamp v flashing in
the speedometer. In this case, proceed as
follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Warning!
G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
!
Switching off the ESP
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Warning!
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
LOW RANGE – ESP
During off-road driving, a special low range
system for the ESP is operational with
transmission in LOW RANGE mode
(컄 page 125).
In the LOW RANGE mode, the ESP operates in a traction improving fashion specifically adapted for off-road driving. At
speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP
assists in over-/understeering, thus improving vehicle traction.
G
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
앫
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
앫
in sand or gravel
앫
when driving off-road
81
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The switch is located in the upper center
console.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when the ESP is deactivated.
The ESP always operates when you are
braking, even when it has been deactivated.
Warning!
i
G
When the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Turn ESP on immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.
ESP on/off switch
왘
Press upper half of the ESP switch.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in
the speedometer comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes, regardless of the
speed.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Switching on the ESP
왘
Press lower half of the ESP switch until
the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in
the speedometer goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 241).
82
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Anti-theft alarm
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone:
Activating
Removing the key from the steering lock
activates the immobilizer.
Deactivating
Turning the key in the steering lock to
position 2 (컄 page 33) deactivates the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(vehicle’s battery is in order), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in
Canada).
앫
opens a door
앫
opens the liftgate
앫
opens the hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
unlocking and opening the driver’s
door with the mechanical key
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system (컄 page 171) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the remote control. The
turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. A
red lamp in the center console will flash after approximately 10 seconds when the
alarm system is completely armed
(컄 page 27).
83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, the tow-away - glass
breakage sensor is malfunctioning or
one of the following elements may not
be properly closed:
The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately
40 seconds if one of the doors or the
liftgate is not opened.
앫
a door
Canceling the alarm
앫
the liftgate
To cancel the alarm:
앫
the hood
왘
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
or
왘
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the remote control. The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is
deactivated.
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
remote control.
The alarm is canceled.
Tow-away alarm, glass breakage
sensor
The tow-away alarm and the glass breakage sensor are part of the anti-theft alarm
system.
84
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone:
앫
attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
breaks a window and reaches into the
passenger compartment
i
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is
lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system (컄 page 171) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
and glass breakage sensor alarm is automatically armed.
Vehicles with trip computer*
왘
The buttons are located in the overhead
control panel.
Turn key in steering lock to position 2
(컄 page 33).
왘
Return key to position 0 and remove it
from the steering lock.
왘
Within 30 seconds press button 1
or 2.
Disarming tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm and
glass breakage sensor before towing the
vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto
train.
The display shows OFF.
왘
1 Reset button
2 Mode button
3 Display
4 Glass breakage sensor
Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with
remote control (컄 page 32).
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage
sensor remain switched off until the key is
inserted in steering lock and turned to
position 1.
85
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Vehicles without trip computer
왘
The buttons are located in the overhead
control panel.
Turn key in steering lock to position 2
(컄 page 33).
왘
Return key to position 0 and remove it
from the steering lock.
왘
왘
Within 30 seconds press button 1 on
the right or left side.
or
왘
Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with
remote control (컄 page 32).
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage
sensor remain switched off until the key is
inserted in steering lock and turned to
position 1.
1 Switching off tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor
86
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
왘
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
remote control.
The alarm is canceled.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Automatic transmission
Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왔 Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are
given at the beginning of each segment.
88
Remote control with folding key
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
remote controls with folding key.
The remote control provides an extended
operating range. To prevent theft,
however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity to
it.
The key centrally locks and unlocks:
앫
the doors
앫
the liftgate
앫
the fuel filler flap
1 Â Panic button (컄 page 75)
2 ΠUnlock button
3 ‹ Lock button
4 Release button for key
5 Š Unlock button for liftgate
i
!
If the key is inserted in the steering
lock, the vehicle cannot be locked or
unlocked with the remote control.
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the remote control to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking
i
Global unlocking
왘
All turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that all doors, fuel filler flap and
liftgate are unlocked.
Unlocking the vehicle with the remote
control deactivates the anti-theft
alarm.
The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor liftgate is
opened.
Press button Πtwice.
Unlocking the liftgate
왘
Press button Š.
Only the liftgate unlocks.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the liftgate
앫
the hood
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
Locking
Unlocking the driver’s door and fuel
filler flap
왘
i
Locking the vehicle with the remote
control activates the anti-theft alarm.
Press button Πonce.
All turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the driver’s door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
왘
Press button ‹ once.
All turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that all doors, the liftgate
and the fuel filler flap are locked.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and / or serious personal injury.
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Loss of remote control with folding key
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the remote control, then
the batteries in the remote control are
discharged, the remote control is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is
drained.
If you lose a remote control or the folding
key, you should do the following:
앫
Check the batteries in the remote
control and replace them if necessary (컄 page 262).
앫
Use the folding key to unlock or
lock the doors and the liftgate.
앫
Check the vehicle battery
(컄 page 278).
앫
Synchronize the remote control
(컄 page 263).
If the remote control is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
90
왘
Have the remote control deactivated
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
왘
Report the loss of the remote control or
the folding key immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘
If necessary have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Pull on door handle 2.
If a door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the remote control, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the alarm.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Opening the liftgate
!
Opening the liftgate from outside
Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7 ft
(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.
i
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
Opening the liftgate from inside
or
A minimum height clearance of 7 ft
(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.
Press the ‹ or Œ button on the
remote control.
The release lever is located on the inside of
the liftgate.
The alarm is cancelled.
1 Grip molding
2 Handle
왘
Pull on handle 2.
왘
Swing the liftgate upward by using the
grip molding.
1 Handle
2 Catch
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
왘
To unlock the liftgate, move the
catch 2 to the right.
Closing the liftgate
Warning!
Pull handle 1 down and swing liftgate
upward.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the liftgate opening when closing the liftgate. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
!
Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
Do not close the liftgate from the inside by
pulling on the handle.
i
To lock the liftgate, move the catch 2
to the left.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Children could open the liftgate
from inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
92
G
1 Recessed grip
2 Grip molding
왘
Pull down on recessed grip 1.
왘
Close liftgate by using grip molding 2.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the liftgate closed as exhaust
fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
i
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
not place the key in the cargo compartment.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the liftgate automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on and
the left front wheel turns at vehicle speeds
of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
Information on towing the vehicle can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 241).
Activating
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The switch is located on the lower center
console.
왘
If one of the front doors is then opened
from the inside, the vehicle is unlocked
centrally unless only the driver's door was
previously unlocked.
Press and hold upper part 1 of the
central locking button for approximately six seconds.
The automatic central locking is
activated.
Deactivating
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
왘
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press and hold lower part 2 of the
central locking button for approximately six seconds.
The automatic central locking is deactivated.
93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example,
if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.
Locking
왘
Press upper part 1 of central locking
button (컄 page 93).
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
94
왘
Press lower part 2 of central locking
button (컄 page 93).
The vehicle unlocks.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the remote control, it will
not unlock using the central locking
switch.
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 34).
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 34).
Warning!
G
Front seat head restraints
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
Removing head restraints
왘
Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
왘
Push button 1 and pull out head
restraint.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing head restraint
Raising:
왘
Insert head restraint and push it down
to the stop.
왘
왘
Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to the desired position
(컄 page 36).
Lowering:
Rear seat head restraints
Head restraint height
왘
Head restraint tilt
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
To lower the head restraint, push
button 1 and press down on the head
restraint.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
96
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
왘
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More informations on seats can be found
in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 34).
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing rear seat head
restraints
Warning!
Installing rear seat head restraints
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
왘
Insert head restraint and push it down
to the stop.
왘
Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to the desired position
(컄 page 36).
Stowing rear center head restraint
Removing rear seat head restraints
왘
Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
왘
Push button 1 and pull out head
restraint.
i
For a better view toward the rear, you
can store the rear center head restraint
underneath the rear seat (컄 page 97).
1 Rear center head restraint
2 Bar
3 Clip
컄컄
97
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄왘
Remove rear center head restraint
(컄 page 96).
왘
If necessary, remove cargo floor plates,
see “Removing cargo floor plates”
(컄 page 162).
왘
Slide rear seats forward, see “Adjusting
rear seat fore and aft” (컄 page 99).
왘
Fold rear seat backrests down, see
“Folding down the backrest”
(컄 page 100).
왘
From cargo compartment, attach rear
center head restraint 1 to underside
of rear center seat.
왘
Heated seats*
Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console.
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press upper switch position 1 again.
The indicator lamp on the switch turns
off.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
20 minutes.
Switching on rapid seat heating
왘
Press lower switch position 2.
Make sure front side of head
restraint 1 is facing upward.
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
turn on.
왘
Press bar 2 on both sides into
clips 3.
i
Switching on seat heating
왘
Start the engine.
Press upper switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
lights up.
98
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one red indicator lamp
remains on.
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating
왘
Rear seats
Adjusting rear seat fore and aft
Press lower switch position 2 again.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
turn off.
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the rear seats while driving.
!
Always seat in an upright position and the
seat belts are properly positioned on the
body. Your seat must be adjusted so that
you can correctly fasten your seat belt.
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off automatically.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
The rear seats are divided asymmetrically.
To enlarge the cargo area you can adjust
the left and right part separately. The following changes are possible:
앫
moving the seat fore and aft
앫
folding down the backrest
앫
lowering the seat
1 Release lever
왘
Pull release lever 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Slide seat to the desired position until
it locks in place.
Warning!
G
Failure to assure that seats are locked into
place could result in an increased chance of
injury in an accident.
99
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding down the backrest
The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 is not visible in the locked
position.
Folding up the backrest
왘
왘
1 Lock button
왘
Close cup holder (컄 page 167) and
ashtray (컄 page 169) in rear center
console (컄 page 167).
왘
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
(컄 page 35) or power seat (컄 page 37).
왘
Slide seat forward.
왘
Remove head restraint(s) (컄 page 95).
왘
Pull lock button 1 up and fold backrest forward until it locks in place.
100
Close cup holder (컄 page 167) and
ashtray (컄 page 169) in rear center
console.
왘
Slide seat rearward to desired position
(컄 page 99).
왘
Adjust front seats to desired position.
Manual seats (컄 page 35) or power
seats (컄 page 37).
Lowering the rear seat
Pull lock button 1 up and unfold backrest until it locks in place.
Make sure the seat belt is not caught in
the seat.
왘
Check for secure locking by pulling and
pushing on the backrest.
The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 is not visible in the locked
position.
왘
Install head restraint (컄 page 96).
1 Release button
2 Lever
3 Release lever
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
Close cup holder in rear center console
(컄 page 167).
왘
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
(컄 page 35) or power seat (컄 page 37).
왘
Press and hold release button 1 to unlock lever 2.
왘
Pull lever 2 in direction of arrow.
왘
Pull release lever 3 and push down
rear seat until it locks in place.
왘
Fold down the backrest (컄 page 100).
왘
Adjust front seats to desired position.
Manual seats (컄 page 35) or power
seats (컄 page 37).
Folding up the rear seat
Folding rear seat forward
왘
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
(컄 page 35) or power seat (컄 page 37).
왘
Pull release lever 3 and raise rear seat
until it locks in place.
Warning!
G
Failure to assure that seats are locked into
place could result in an increased chance of
injury in an accident.
1 Lever
왘
Move right seat forward. Manual seats
(컄 page 35) or power seats
(컄 page 37).
왘
Move rear seat forward (컄 page 99).
왘
Push head restraint fully down and tilt
it forward.
왘
Fold backrest forward (컄 page 100).
왘
Pull lever 1 up and fold the rear seat
forward.
Easy entry/exit feature*
The easy entry/exit feature allows access
to the third row seats*. The right cargo
floor plate must be removed (컄 page 162).
Warning!
G
Never drive with the second row right seat
folded forward (easy entry/exit feature). It
could open and fold back unintentionally.
101
Controls in detail
Seats
Resetting rear seat
왘
Move the rear and front seats in desired position.
왘
Pull up and adjust head restraint
(컄 page 36).
Folding down single seat
Third row seats*
Warning!
왘
Pull down on seat bench until it locks
into place.
왘
Pull lock button 1 (컄 page 100) up
and unfold backrest until it locks into
place.
왘
Check for secure locking by pulling and
pushing on the backrest.
The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 (컄 page 100) is not visible in
the locked position.
102
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that head restraint
supports the back of the head at eye level.
This will reduce the potential for injury to the
head and neck in the event of an accident or
similar situation.
Failure to assure that seats are locked into
place could result in an increased chance of
injury in an accident.
1 Head restraint
2 Hook
3 Tensioner
4 Hook and loop velcro strip
왘
Remove cargo floor plate
(컄 page 162).
왘
Remove head restraint 1 from seat
cushion.
왘
Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizontal position to release tension of the
belt.
왘
Disengage hook 2 while holding onto
the seat firmly with one hand.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
Attach belt at hook and loop velcro
strip 4 (컄 page 102) on underside of
seat.
왘
Install head restraint 1 in backrest
(컄 page 102).
Storing single seat
왘
Disengage belt and engage hook 2
(컄 page 102) in ceiling mount.
왘
Pull on free end of belt until tight.
왘
Install head restraint in openings
provided in seat cushion.
왘
Install cargo floor plates (컄 page 162).
Warning!
5 Backrest release
6 Seat release
왘
Fold seat down until it locks securely in
place.
왘
Remove head restraint from backrest
(컄 page 102).
왘
Pull backrest release 5 and fold backrest forward until it locks securely in
place.
왘
Remove cargo floor plates from the
backrest.
왘
Pull seat release 6 (컄 page 103) and
fold seat up.
The red marking on the seat release 6
should not be visible.
왘
Store cargo floor plates inside the
backrest (컄 page 162).
왘
Pull backrest release 5 and unfold
backrest until it locks securely in place.
G
After folding the seats up, manually place
the lap belt portion of the seat belt behind
the seat (arrow). Otherwise, the lap belt may
be subject to damage and could rip.
103
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing single seat
1 Hook
2 Tensioner
3 Hook and loop velcro strip
4 Release lever
104
왘
Lift tensioner 2 upward to a horizontal position to release tension of the
belt.
왘
Disengage hook 1 while holding onto
the seat firmly with one hand.
왘
Attach belt at hook and loop strip 3
on underside of seat.
왘
Move release lever 4 upward and remove seat.
Installing single seat
왘
Place seat into the mounting clamps
and click the seat into place.
Controls in detail
Memory function*
왔 Memory function*
!
Prior to operating the vehicle the driver
should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. See also the
section on airbags (컄 page 59) for
proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and
210.2.
With the memory button you can store up
to three different settings for the driverand passenger seat.
Together with the driver’s seat you can
store the exterior rear view mirrors.
For information on activating the parking
position feature, see “Activating exterior
rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 127).
For the front passenger seat you can store
the seat position.
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
1 Position buttons
2 Memory button
105
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing parking position
i
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
왘
Press button 2.
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 3 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
왘
Press memory button 2 (컄 page 105).
왘
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 3.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
Storing positions in memory
Do not operate the power seats using
the memory button if the seat backrest
is in an excessively reclined position.
Doing so could cause damage to front
or rear seats.
왘
왘
Adjust the seat (컄 page 37) and exterior rear view mirrors (컄 page 40) to the
desired position.
Press and hold one of the position
buttons 1 until seat and rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions.
왘
Push memory button 2 (컄 page 105).
i
왘
Release memory button and press one
of the position buttons 1 within three
seconds.
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
106
!
The selected position will be stored relative to the position button 1
(컄 page 105) pressed.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
왘
Recalling positions from memory
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps (컄 page 48) and use the turn signals
(컄 page 49), see the “Getting started” section.
Combination switch
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
i
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps, license plate lamps
and instrument panel lamps
Canada only: With the engine running, the low beam headlamps
additionally switched on.
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
õ Low beam or high beam headlamps
ƒ Left or right standing lamps
(symbol on underside of switch)
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
If you remove the key and open the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then a warning sounds.
Warning!
If the combination switch is set to U,
앫
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
combination switch. For combination
switch, see (컄 page 107).
Automatic headlamp mode
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
왘
Turn the combination switch to U.
108
G
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning combination
switch to õ when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to õ with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to õ will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
i
If the automatic headlamp mode is activated, the fog lamps can also be
switched on (컄 page 111). The low
beam headlamp and parking lamps are
activated simultaneously.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Night security illumination
Canada only:
When you turn off the engine and the last
door has been closed, the following lamps
will remain lit:
왘
Turn combination switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the parking
lamps will also switch on.
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(three minutes delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
combination switch to position õ to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
i
The high beam flasher is always available.
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The combination switch must be set to
position U (컄 page 107).
Deactivating night security illumination
temporarily
왘
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key
in the steering lock to position 0
(컄 page 33) then turn it to position 2
and back to 0.
The night security illumination is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
start the engine.
Setting illumination time
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door or the
liftgate.
If you do not open a door or the liftgate
after turning off the engine, the lamps
will automatically switch off after
60 seconds.
1 Switch for fog lamps
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
왘
Stop the vehicle.
Locator lighting
Switching on high beams
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the vehicle is unlocked by
remote control:
왘
Turn the combination switch
to õ(컄 page 107).
왘
Push the combination switch forward.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
왘
왘
왘
Turn combination switch to
position M.
Press upper part 1 of switch until the
clock, located in the instrument cluster, displays the actual illumination
time.
Press upper part 1 of switch again.
Each time the switch is pressed, the
illumination time increases by
15 seconds. You can set the illumination time between 0 (off) and
60 seconds.
Approximately five seconds after pressing
the switch, the illumination time is set and
the clock is displayed again.
110
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The combination switch must be set to
position U (컄 page 107).
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
The high beam indicator A in the
instrument cluster comes on.
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Fog lamps
Switching front fog lamps and rear fog
lamps on and off
G
왘
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
from U to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
왘
Press lower part 3 of switch.
Warning!
i
The fog lamps can be switched on with
combination switch in position õ
or U. Consult your state Motor Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
The switch is located on the upper center
console.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
instrument cluster comes on in addition to the yellow indicator lamp 2 in
the switch.
1 Front fog lamps
2 Indicator lamp
3 Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
왘
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
instrument cluster and the yellow indicator lamp 2 in the switch go out.
Switching front fog lamps on and off
왘
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘
Press upper part 1 of switch.
Switching rear fog lamp on and off
왘
Press upper part 1 of switch again.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Press upper part 1 of switch.
The yellow indicator lamp 2 in the
switch goes out.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
instrument cluster comes on.
왘
Press lower part 3 of switch again.
왘
Press upper part 1 of switch.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
instrument cluster goes out.
111
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It
is activated automatically when an airbag
is deployed.
The switch is located on top of the steering
column.
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
All the turn signals will flash.
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
i
If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press the hazard
warning flasher switch twice to deactivate.
Hazard warning flasher switch
112
1 Left front interior lamp lens
2 Right front interior lamp lens
3 Automatic function off
4 Automatic function on
5 Rear interior lighting
Controls in detail
Lighting
Automatic control
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps (except cargo compartment
lamp) switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
Activating automatic control
왘
Bring the rocker switch to center
position 4.
Interior lamps (except cargo compartment lamp) are switched on in darkness, when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the key from the steering
lock
In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the
door trays will come on when you open
a door.
When all doors are closed and no key is
inserted in the steering lock, the interior lamps are switched off after a brief
delay.
Manual control
i
i
If a lamp is switched on manually, it will
not go out automatically. This could
cause the battery to become discharged.
Deactivating automatic control
왘
Press lower part 3 of rocker switch.
Switching on front interior lamps
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
왘
앫
unlock the vehicle
Switching off front interior lamps
앫
open a door
왘
앫
remove the key from the steering
lock
Press on lamp lens 1 or 2.
The respective lamp switches on.
Press on lamp lens 1 or 2 again.
The respective lamp switches off.
Operating rear interior lighting with
rocker switch
왘
Press on upper part 5 of rocker
switch.
컄컄
The rear interior lighting goes on.
113
Controls in detail
Lighting
컄컄왘
Press on upper part 5 of rocker
switch again.
Reading lamps in inside rear view
mirror
Cargo compartment lamp
The rear interior lighting goes off.
If the switch is pressed while the rear
interior lighting is on, the function is reversed.
Operating rear interior lighting with
lamp lens
1 Reading lamps
2 Reading lamps on/off
1 Switched off
2 Switched on continuously
3 Automatic control
Switching reading lamp on and off
Switching off cargo compartment lamp
왘
왘
Press button 2.
The lamp switches on.
Rear interior lighting
왘
Push on lamp lens (arrow) to switch
rear interior lighting on or off.
114
왘
Press button 2 again.
The lamp switches off.
Slide the switch to position 1.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched off, even when the liftgate is
opened.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on continuous cargo
compartment lamp
왘
Slide the switch to position 2.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched on continuously.
Automatic control
왘
Slide the switch to position 3.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched on and off by opening or closing the liftgate.
i
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged, make sure the switch is
not in position 2 when leaving the vehicle.
115
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 24).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
앫
open the driver’s door
앫
turn the key in steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (컄 page 33)
앫
press the left knob 1
Instrument cluster illumination
i
You can set the instrument cluster illumination with the following lamps on:
앫
parking lamps
앫
low beam headlamps
앫
high beam headlamps
To brighten illumination
왘
1 Left knob
2 Right knob
Turn knob 1 clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘
Turn knob 1 counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
116
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
Under normal driving conditions, the coolant temperature may rise to 248°F
(120°C). The coolant temperature may
climb to the red marking:
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
during stop-and-go city traffic
앫
when driving on hilly terrain
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature in the red zone.
Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Display in the speedometer
Changing display
왘
Press the left knob 1 in the instrument cluster (컄 page 116).
The display changes between main
odometer and trip odometer.
왘
Press the left knob 1 twice.
The next scheduled service is displayed
(컄 page 232).
117
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Resetting trip odometer
왘
왘
Outside temperature indicator
Setting the clock
Press the left knob 1 (컄 page 116) repeatedly until you see the trip odometer display.
Warning!
Press and hold the left knob 1 until
the trip odometer is reset.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Tachometer
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
above its specified limit.
G
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 24).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
118
Hour
왘
Pull out the right knob 2 in the instrument cluster (컄 page 116) and turn it
counterclockwise.
Minutes
왘
Pull out the right knob 2 in the instrument cluster (컄 page 116) and turn it
clockwise.
i
To set the clock by a single hour or a
few minutes, turn knob 2 just a few
degrees in the direction indicated for
hours or minutes.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
Information on driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting
started” section (컄 page 46).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the gear selector lever position D with
gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 121)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 123)
앫
the vehicle speed
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the tachometer display
(컄 page 24).
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
119
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 121).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
120
i
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D– direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
왘
Upshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the tachometer display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmission’s gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range appears in the
tachometer display. If you press on the
accelerator when the engine has reached
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Effect
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
Effect
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
121
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The key can only be removed
from the steering lock with the
gear selector lever in position P.
With the key removed, the gear
selector lever is locked in
position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(컄 page 264).
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
122
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 53).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Accelerator position
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, take it with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could move
the gear selector lever from position P,
which could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
123
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Towing a trailer
If you tow a trailer, note the following
points:
앫
Manually shift to a lower gear range
(4, 3, 2, 1), if the transmission hunts
between gears on inclines
(컄 page 121).
A lower gear range and reduction of
speed reduces the change to overload
or overheat the engine.
앫
At very steep inclines switch transfer
case to LOW RANGE mode
(컄 page 125).
For more information on trailer towing, see
the “Operation” section (컄 page 206).
124
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode
왔 Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode
In the following situations you should
switch to LOW RANGE mode:
앫
during off-road driving
앫
when crossing water
앫
!
왘
You should only operate the vehicle on
a single axle dynamometer for briefly
testing the brakes.
During the changeover the indicator
lamp (컄 page 25) flashes three times.
Once the changeover is complete, the
indicator lamp comes on continuously.
The key must be in steering lock
position 1 (컄 page 33).
when towing up or down on steep
gradients
Press on the upper part of the switch.
Switching off LOW RANGE mode
Switching on LOW RANGE mode
!
Only switch the LOW RANGE mode on
or off, when the vehicle is
앫
at a complete standstill
앫
the engine speed is less than
1500 rpm
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
왘
Press on the upper part of the switch.
During the changeover the indicator
lamp (컄 page 25) flashes three times.
Failure to do so may result in transmission or engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Once the changeover is complete, the
indicator lamp goes out.
LOW RANGE mode switch
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
For information on driving safety systems
during LOW RANGE mode see the “Safety
and Security” section (컄 page 76).
125
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 49) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (컄 page 40) is found in the
“Getting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when:
앫
the automatic antiglare function is activated (컄 page 127)
앫
the ignition is switched on
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
1 Lever
왘
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving lever 1 towards the
windshield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
126
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior light is turned on
Warning!
G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the cargo area is fully
loaded.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning!
G
Activating
The buttons are on the lower part of the
center console.
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
1 Button
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 again.
1 Deactivating parking position
2 Activating parking position
3 Adjustment button
왘
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 106).
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
왘
Press button 2.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
127
컄컄
Controls in detail
Good visibility
컄컄왘
Engage reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves automatically to the
stored parking position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
stored driving position:
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors
!
Before driving the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
mirrors in. Otherwise they may get
damaged.
앫
ten seconds after you put the gear
selector lever in position D
앫
immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
manually*
앫
immediately when you press the
button 1 for driver’s side mirror
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not completely folded out.
i
If the button 1 is pressed, the automatic passenger-side exterior rear view
parking position is deactivated.
The buttons are located on the upper center console.
1 Folds the exterior mirrors in
2 Folds the exterior mirrors out
왘
Check that the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
i
With the front doors closed, the exterior mirrors can still be folded in and out
approximately 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
128
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding in
Folding out
왘
왘
Briefly press button 1 (컄 page 127).
Briefly press button 2.
The mirrors fold in.
The mirrors fold out.
!
!
Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
mirrors in, otherwise they may get
damaged.
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear), reposition it manually by applying
firm pressure until it snaps back into
place.
i
If an exterior rear view mirror is forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front)
press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then
press button 2 to fold mirrors out. Do
not force mirrors by hand as this may
damage the adjustment mechanism.
If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not
able to fold the exterior mirrors in.
The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.
Windshield wipers
Information on the windshield wipers is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 49).
!
If leaves, snow, etc. block the windshield wipers, the wiper motor turns
off.
앫
For safety reasons, withdraw key
from steering lock. Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position 1,
앫
set the wiper switch to the next
highest wiper speed.
앫
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
129
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Intermittent wiping
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
Windshield wipers with rain sensor*
!
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Windshield wipers without rain sensor*
Set the wiper switch to position 1
(컄 page 49).
At speeds of approximately 105 mph
(170 km/h) the wiper switches automatically to continuous wiping. Always obey local speed limits.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor which monitors the wetness of
windshield.
i
When intermittent wiping is on and the
key is turned from position 1 to
position 2 in the steering lock
(컄 page 33), and kept in that position
for longer than two seconds, the wipe
interval will be set to approximately
five seconds.
130
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the right side of
the dashboard.
Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section (컄 page 224).
Rear window wiper
The rear window wiper will also automatically engage if the windshield wiper is engaged and the gear selector lever is placed
in reverse.
Rear window wiper with rain sensor*
Rear window wiper intervals are controlled
automatically according to the amount of
water on the windshield and the speed of
the vehicle, if:
앫
rear window wiper is switched on
앫
front windshield wipers are switched to
intermittent wiping
The interval for the rear window wiper remains constant when the windshield wiper
interval is ten seconds or more.
Headlamp washer button
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Briefly press the upper part of button.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
131
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visor
Illuminated vanity mirrors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
1 Mirror cover
2 Mounting
왘
왘
Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.
To use mirror, lift cover 1 up.
i
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from
mounting 2 and pivot to the side.
132
왘
Turn the key in steering lock to
position 1 (컄 page 33).
왘
Lift cover up.
The lamp switches on.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
Warning!
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated
after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of
operation depending on the outside temperature.
Activating
왘
Switch ignition on.
왘
Press button F (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button F again.
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
133
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
왔 Automatic climate control
134
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
Item
1 Thumbwheel for center air vent
1 Air volume control
2 Center air vent, adjustable
2 Defrosting
3 Defroster air vent windshield
3 Air recirculation
4 Thumbwheels for side air vent
4 Temperature control
5 Side air vent, adjustable
5 Automatic control (temperature, air
distribution, air volume)
6 Footwell air vent
7 Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel in the front
6 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
Residual heat/ventilation (REST)
7 Interior temperature sensor
8 Air distribution control
9 Rear window defroster
a Rear passenger compartment ventilation on/off
135
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You
can operate the climate control system in
either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents.
136
Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(컄 page 138).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not touch the interior temperature
sensor to maintain a precise temperature.
The set value is indicated by a lighted
segment on the control wheels.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic mode
Activating basic setting
왘
Switching on
왘
Briefly press button U
(컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp comes on. The temperature, air volume and distribution
are controlled automatically.
왘
Adjust the temperature with the temperature control 4 (컄 page 135).
Temperature control is switched off in
the extreme position (blue or red dot).
Switching off
왘
Briefly press button U
(컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp goes out. The automatic mode is switched off.
Press button U at least
three seconds.
Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually
i
All functions are switched to automatic
mode and temperature is set to 72°F
(22°C).
If you turn air volume control 1 or air
distribution control 8 (컄 page 135),
the automatic mode switches off. The
indicator lamp in the button U goes
out. The temperature control will still
be in automatic mode.
Changing basic setting
왘
Set temperature control 4
(컄 page 135) to desired temperature.
왘
Press button U for ten seconds.
Adjusting air volume
The selected temperature value is
stored and set.
왘
i
Adjust temperature settings in small
increments.
Turn air volume control 1 to one of
five air volume settings.
i
When set to 0 the system is fully deactivated and no fresh air is supplied. This
setting should only be selected for
short periods of time.
Air volume control 1 is set to fan
speed 2 and air distribution is set
to V.
137
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
왘
Defrosting
Turn air distribution control 8
(컄 page 135) to one the following
symbols:
Symbol
Function
h
Directs air to the center
and side air vents
j
Directs air to the windshield and side air vents
V
Directs air into the entire vehicle interior
k
Directs air to the footwells and side air vents
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
When the defrost setting has been selected, only the rear window defroster
can be switched on. No other settings
are possible.
Activating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Windshield fogged on the outside
Deactivating
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on,
(컄 page 50).
왘
왘
Turn air distribution control 8 to h
or k.
138
Press button P again.
or
왘
Press button U (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button P
goes out.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
왘
Press button Ä (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
To achieve the fastest possible cooling
of the interior, the automatic climate
control automatically switches to air
recirculation. The indicator lamp in the
button Ä is not illuminated when
the system automatically switches to
air recirculation.
Deactivating
왘
Press button Ä (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
Deactivating
The air recirculation mode is
deactivated automatically
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
앫
after 30 minutes if the automatic
climate control is switched on
앫
after five minutes if the air conditioning is switched off
앫
after five minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately 45°F (7°C)
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
왘
Press button ° (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button °
comes on.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button ° again.
The indicator lamp on the button °
goes out.
The air conditioning system uses the refrigerant R-134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.
139
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
!
If the ° button on the automatic
climate control panel starts to flash,
this indicates that the air conditioning
system is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air
conditioning cannot be turned on
again.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
i
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set in the
climate control. The blower will run at
lower speed regardless of the air volume control setting.
Activating
왘
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 0 or 1 (컄 page 33).
왘
Press button ° (컄 page 135).
The indicator lamp on button °
comes on.
140
Deactivating
왘
Press button °.
The indicator lamp on button °
goes out.
i
The residual heat is automatically
turned off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the coolant temperature is too
low
앫
if the battery voltage drops
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment ventilation and rear automatic climate control
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control panel for the
rear is located on the rear center console.
Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually
i
Deactivating
When the air volume or air distribution
control is pressed, the automatic mode
is switched off. The indicator lamp in
button U is turned off. Temperature
setting remains in automatic mode.
For an improved cooling or heating output
in the front passenger compartment, you
can switch off the rear passenger compartment ventilation.
왘
Press button § (컄 page 135).
Adjusting air volume
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The operation of the rear automatic
climate control and the fresh air supply
to the rear compartment is shut off.
Activating
왘
Press button § again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The rear automatic climate control
switches to automatic mode and fresh
air enters the rear compartment.
왘
1 Air volume control
2 Air distribution control
3 Automatic control (air distribution, air
volume)
왘
Press button U.
Press upper part of button R.
The blower setting is increased each
time the button is pressed.
왘
Press lower part of button R.
The blower setting is decreased each
time the button is pressed.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The automatic climate control cools or
heats the interior depending on the
temperature selected on the front
climate control unit.
141
컄컄
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
컄컄
!
Adjusting air distribution
When in manual mode, the rear blower
setting cannot be increased beyond
the setting for the front blower setting.
For example, if the driver or front passenger changes the blower setting to
level 3, the rear blower will not go higher than level 3 as well.
왘
Press upper part of button Ô.
Air is directed upwards.
왘
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 (컄 page 135) to
one of the following positions:
Press lower part of button Ó.
Symbol
Function
Air is directed to the footwell.
h
Open
l
Ventilation of side
windows in area of
exterior mirror
M
Closed
Front and rear air vents
i
For draft-free ventilation, adjust the air
vents upwards.
To allow unrestricted operation of the
automatic climate control, the air vents
should remain open.
142
Adjusting side air vents
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Center air vents
Rear passenger compartment air vents
Opening
왘
Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1
(컄 page 135) upward to position h.
Closing
왘
Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1
downward to position M.
Use the left thumbwheel to adjust the center air vents on the left and in the center.
Use the right thumbwheel to adjust the
right center air vent.
1 Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Right center air vent, adjustable
i
The temperature at the air vents for the
rear passenger compartment is the
same as at the dashboard center air
vents.
143
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the side windows
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pressed the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the passenger door and on the rear center console.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pressing the
switch and holding it there, the automatic
reversal function will not operate.
6 Left rear window
7 Right rear window
Warning!
1 Left front window
2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 73).
Additional switches for the rear windows
are located on the rear center console.
144
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respective switch.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘
Turn key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening the windows
왘
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k to the resistance point.
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
If the window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, then hold the
switch j down. The side window
will then close without the obstruction
sensor function.
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k past the resistance point
and release.
The corresponding window opens completely.
Warning!
Closing the windows
왘
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol j to the resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning
G
If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘
Press switch 1 to 4 at symbol j
past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes completely.
!
G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds switch j is again
pressed past the resistance point and
released, the automatic reversal will not
operate.
Stopping windows
왘
Press respective switch again.
If the upward movement of the window
is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open
slightly.
Remove the obstruction, press the
switch j again past the resistance
point and release.
145
Controls in detail
Power windows
Synchronizing power windows
Rear quarter windows*
The power window must be resynchronized each time
The switches are on the upper part of the
center console.
Warning!
앫
after the battery has been disconnected.
앫
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close).
Synchronizing the power windows
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press the power window switches at
the symbol j until the side windows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power window are synchronized.
1 Left side
2 Right side
왘
Turn key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2.
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure. The closing of the
windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the switch.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Opening the windows
왘
Press and hold the upper part of
switches 1 or 2.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
146
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing the windows
왘
Press and hold the lower part of
switches 1 or 2.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
147
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
왔 Sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
and closed electrically. The switch for the
sliding/pop-roof is on the overhead
control panel.
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from steering lock and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.
Warning!
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
2 Push back to slide roof open
3 Push down to lower roof at rear
4 Push forward to slide roof closed
148
G
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing procedure can be immediately
reversed by moving the switch in
direction 1 or 2.
Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 265).
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
왘
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (컄 page 33).
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Opening the sliding/pop-up roof automatically
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually
왘
Briefly press switch in direction 2.
앫
The sliding/pop up roof will not open
completely.
the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly
앫
a malfunction
To open, close, raise or lower the
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
in the required direction 1 to 4.
왘
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the desired position.
Stopping the roof
Press switch again to open the
sliding/pop-up roof completely.
Synchronizing
왘
Remove the fuse from the fuse box
(컄 page 287).
왘
Replace the fuse in the fuse box.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
Press and hold the switch in
direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up
roof is fully raised at the rear.
Lowering the roof
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized each time after:
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
왘
앫
The sliding/pop-up roof is synchronized.
왘
Raising the roof
Briefly press the switch in any direction.
왘
The movement of the roof will stop.
Press and hold the switch in
direction 1.
The roof is raised at rear.
Pull and hold the switch in direction 3.
The sliding/ pop-up roof is lowered and
closed.
the battery has been disconnected
149
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed.
앫
Parktronic*, with which you can assist
your parking maneuvers.
The driving systems BAS, ABS, ESP, EBB
and 4-ETS, are described in the “Safety
and Security” section (컄 page 76).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (컄 page 23).
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain
responsible for the vehicle speed and for
safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
150
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
!
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at last set speed
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
151
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
i
왘
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
왘
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate the cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Setting a lower speed
왘
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Slower
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
G
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
Cruise control will resume the last set
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Transmission in LOW RANGE mode
i
The cruise control should not be used
during off-road driving.
152
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to nor does it replace the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other critical maneuvers rests
always with the driver.
Make sure that no persons or animals are located in the area in which your are maneuvering. They could otherwise be injured.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or
street curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.
Parktronic system monitors your vehicle’s
environment by means of six sensors in
the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system assists the driver
during parking maneuvers. It visually and
audibly indicates the distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
With the ignition on, the Parktronic system
engages automatically at speeds up to approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) and deactivates during higher speeds.
1 Sensors located in front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. For notes
on cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 237).
153
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Monitoring reach of sensors
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
snow or they will be unable to function
properly. Clean the sensors regularly without scratching or damaging them.
Front sensors
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 39 in (100 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Center
approx. 47 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
When an obstacle is located in this area, all
warning displays will light up and a warning
tone will sound. If the vehicle moves closer
than the minimum distance to an object,
the distance may no longer be displayed.
Rear sensors
i
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects
at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
154
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
The warning indicators show the distance
between the sensor and the obstacle. The
warning indicators for the front area are located above the center air vents in the
dashboard. The warning indicator for the
rear area is located in the rear passenger
compartment lamp.
The gear selector lever position determines which warning indicator is activated.
Selector lever
position
Warning indicator
D, R, N, P
Front area activated
R
Rear area activated
!
If all red segments light up in the warning indicators, a dirty sensor or a ultrasonic signal could be the reason.
앫
Clean the sensors (컄 page 237).
After cleaning the sensors, switch
the ignition on.
As soon as the sensors detect an obstacle,
one or more segments light up, depending
on the distance. An intermittent acoustic
warning will also sound as the seventh segment comes on and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
three seconds will sound for the eighth
segment.
1 Segments, left side of vehicle
2 Segments, right side of vehicle
Each warning indicator has six yellow and
two red segments.
155
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching Parktronic system on/off
!
i
You can switch Parktronic system off
manually.
If the Parktronic system is malfunctioning, all red segments of the warning indicators light up and an additional
warning sounds.
If you switch the ignition on, the
Parktronic system will be automatically
switched on.
The switch is located on the lower part of
the center console.
Contact your Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible.
Switching Parktronic off
왘
Press switch on the upper part 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching Parktronic on
왘
1 Parktronic off
2 Indicator lamp
3 Parktronic on
156
Press switch on the upper part 3.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
The rear Parktronic sensors will not automatically disengage when towing a
trailer. Therefore switch the Parktronic
system off.
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Loading instructions
Warning!
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, always use partition net when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with the liftgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
Please pay attention to and comply with
the following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and luggage/cargo must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) for your vehicle. In addition, the
load must be distributed in such a way so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axle. The GVWR and
GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the
certification label which can be found on
the left door pillar.
앫
Always place items being carried
against front or rear seat backrests,
and fasten them as securely as possible.
앫
The heaviest portion of the cargo
should always be kept as low as possible against front or rear seat backrests.
157
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings
The cargo area is provided with four
tie-down rings. Additional two rings are located at the rear of front seats.
The cargo area is the preferred place to
carry objects. The enlarged cargo area
should only be used for items which do
not fit in the cargo area alone.
158
i
While the partition net* (컄 page 159)
will help protect you from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the passenger area in an accident. Such items
must be properly secured using the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo area
floor.
For additional safety when transporting
cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied,
fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into
the opposite side buckles.
i
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all rings with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
Cargo tie-down ring
Controls in detail
Loading
Hooks
Four hooks located on the rear compartment trim panels, two on each side.
Partition net*
Warning!
G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or cargo is being carried behind the
seat bench.
Use of the partition net is a particularly important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects.
The partition net can be installed behind
the backrests of the front or rear seats.
Engaging partition net
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects flying in the occupant area during a
collision or sudden maneuver, always use
partition net when transporting cargo.
Hooks
Use the hooks to secure light weight items.
The maximum permissible weight per hook
is 9 lbs (4 kg).
The partition net cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger area in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo
tie-down rings in the cargo area floor
(컄 page 158).
Passenger use of seats behind installed partition net is restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the net.
1 Holder
2 Mounting hook
159
Controls in detail
Loading
왘
One after the other, press the two
mounting hooks 2 inward against the
spring pressure and turn them.
The mounting hooks are locked in this
position and you can move the net into
position more easily.
왘
Tightening partition net
i
Before tightening the partition net,
remove the cargo floor plates
(컄 page 162).
Turn one of the mounting hooks 2 in
the opposite direction.
The spring pressure will push it out.
왘
Engage mounting hook 2 in
holder 1.
왘
Turn the other mounting hook and engage it in the opposite holder.
왘
Push both mounting hooks 2 forward
into holder 1.
Installation behind the rear seats
1 Tie-down hook
2 Ring
3 Tensioner
Insert tie-down hook 1 in rings 2.
왘
Pull on loose ends of tie-down straps
until net is tight.
왘
After driving a short distance, check
the tension on the net and retighten if
necessary.
Installation behind the front seats
1 Tie-down hook
2 Ring
160
왘
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing partition net
왘
Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizontal position to release tensioning of the
strap.
왘
Disengage tie-down hooks 1 from
rings 2.
왘
Remove mounting hooks 2
(컄 page 159) from holder 1
(컄 page 159).
왘
Roll up and close the partition net.
왘
Store partition net behind rear seat
bench.
Cargo area cover blind*
Opening blind
왘
Disengage blind and guide retraction
by its handle.
Removing blind
1 Handle
2 Holder
Warning!
G
Passenger use of third row seats with cargo
area cover blind installed is restricted.
3 Button
4 Mounting sleeve
왘
Roll the blind up.
왘
Push mounting sleeve 4 inward
against spring pressure until it engages.
왘
Remove blind from mounts.
Closing blind
왘
왘
Pull blind on handle 1 across the cargo area.
Guide blind into holders 2.
161
Controls in detail
Loading
Installing blind
왘
Place left side of blind in left mount.
왘
Position right side of blind over right
mount.
왘
Push button 3, releasing mounting
sleeve to slide into mount.
Cargo floor plates
Storing cargo floor plates
Removing cargo floor plates
i
Before you can remove the cargo floor
plates, it is possible that the third row
seats* (컄 page 102) must be removed.
1 Hook and loop strip
왘
Lift cargo floor plate at rear edge
(arrow).
Cargo floor plate unhinges automatically.
왘
162
Remove cargo floor plate by pulling it
rearwards.
왘
Fold the left cargo floor plate together.
왘
Open the hook and loop strip at the
bottom of backrest of the third row
seats* and insert cargo floor plate.
왘
Close the hook and loop strip.
Controls in detail
Loading
Installing cargo floor plates
Roof rack*
!
Attach roof racks to the roof rails only.
Warning!
G
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
The maximum roof load when using roof
rack systems is 220 lbs (100 kg).
1 Opening
2 Pins
3 Attachment opening
4 Latch
왘
Use only those roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
For further information, inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Grip into opening 1 and guide pins 2
into attachment opening 3.
The center pin must snap into place in
latch 4.
Roof rails
163
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Warning!
Glove box
Storage compartment under front
passenger seat*
The storage compartment is lockable with
its separate key.
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Always use partition net when transporting
cargo. Partition net cannot secure hard or
heavy objects.
1 Glove box lid release
2 Glove box lid
i
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
The opened glove box is illuminated
with the key in steering lock position 1
(컄 page 33).
Opening the glove box
왘
Grab in recess and pull lid release 1.
The glove box lid 2 opens downward.
Closing the glove box
왘
164
Push glove box lid up to close.
1 Lock cylinder
2 Handle
Locking and unlocking the storage compartment
왘
Turn the key clockwise.
The storage compartment is locked.
왘
Turn the key counterclockwise.
The storage compartment is unlocked.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the storage compartment
Armrest storage spaces
왘
A flat storage tray with a deeper storage
compartment underneath is located below
the armrest. Both can be opened separately.
Press the lock cylinder in and pull storage compartment out using handle 2.
Closing the storage compartment
왘
Push the storage compartment in until
the lock engages.
4 Storage tray
5 Coin holder
Opening the storage tray
왘
1 Button to open storage tray
2 Button to open storage compartment
3 Open cover
Press button 1 and lift up armrest.
The armrest contains two coin holders.
Opening the storage compartment
왘
Press button 2 and lift up armrest.
165
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the storage compartment in
front of armrest
왘
Slide the cover 3 rearward.
The storage compartment below contains a cup holder (컄 page 167).
Cup holders
Warning!
Cup holder in instrument panel
G
A cup holder is located on both the right
and left side of the instrument panel.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
Opening the cup holder
왘
Briefly touch top of cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Closing the cup holder
왘
166
Fold the cup holder upwards and press
on it until it engages.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of armrest
Cup holder in rear center console
Armrest in rear seat bench
Opening the cup holder
Opening the cup holder
왘
왘
Slide cover rearward (컄 page 166).
왘
왘
Fold the cup holder forward.
Pull the armrest down by its top.
Briefly touch the cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Closing the cup holder
Closing the cup holder
왘
Fold the cup holder backward.
왘
왘
Slide cover forward.
Press the cup holder forward and press
on it until it engages.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat bench.
167
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays and cigarette lighter
Warning!
Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the
front center console
G
Warning!
i
The cigarette lighter socket can be
used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum of 50 W.
If the engine is off, the battery may become discharged when used for long
periods of time.
168
G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
from movement. Move gear selector lever to
position N. With gear selector lever in
position N, turn off the engine.
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
key from the steering lock. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Removing ashtray insert
왘
1 Ashtray
2 Cigarette lighter
3 Cover plate
Opening the ashtray
왘
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘
Briefly touch cover plate 3.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
out upwards.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘
Install ashtray insert.
왘
Close the ashtray.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘
Switch on the ignition.
왘
Install ashtray insert.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 2
(컄 page 168).
왘
Close the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter
The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the rear
center console
!
Close the ashtray in the rear center
console before folding the rear seat
bench.
1 Ashtray
2 Cigarette lighter
3 Cover plate
왘
Switch on the ignition.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.
Opening the ashtray
왘
Briefly touch cover plate 3.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
out upwards.
169
Controls in detail
Useful features
Electrical outlet
i
The outlets function even if the key is
not in the ignition.
The electrical outlet can be used to
accommodate electrical consumers
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
maximum of 180 W.
If the engine is off, the battery may become discharged if used for long periods of time.
Electrical outlet
One outlet is located in the front passenger footwell and another on the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
Telephone*
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio
transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
170
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his /her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the MCS (Modular Control System)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions
permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
You can take and place telephone calls
using the MCS unit.
See separate instruction manual for information on how to operate the telephone.
Warning!
G
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering or placing a call.
Tele Aid*
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning key
in steering lock to position 2
(컄 page 33) and the message TELE
AID – NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in
the MCS display for approximately
10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Observe all legal requirements
171
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
i
System self-check
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ are located in the overhead control panel.
Initially, after turning the key in the steering lock to position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps
in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID - VISIT WORKSHOP appears for approx. 10 seconds in the MCS
display.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
automatic and manual emergency
앫
roadside assistance and
앫
information.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted using the volume control on
the MCS unit.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
172
Shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, profile
and more.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this
occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
The Tele Aid control unit is located under
the front passenger seat. If there is accumulation of water or other liquid in this area,
the Tele Aid control unit could suffer an
electrical short circuit making the system inoperative. In this case the indicator lamp in
the SOS button will not illuminate during or
will remain illuminated after the system
self-check. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP is displayed in the MCS
display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
앫
following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning detractors
(ETDs) or airbags deploy,
앫
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 83) and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 84).
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
173
Controls in detail
Useful features
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the MCS display. When the connection is established,
the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears in the MCS display. The Response
Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided
they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
174
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response center.
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the response center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display
for approx. ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
1 Cover
2 Roadside Assistance button •
왘
The cover will open.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘
Press and hold the button 2 (for longer than two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the MCS display.
175
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data
generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to
availability of cellular and GPS signals).
i
While the call is connected you can
change to navigation menu by pressing
NAVI button on the MCS unit.
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
system mutes and the message TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE appears in the MCS display.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
176
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For
services such as labor and/or towing,
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable,
앫
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. ten seconds
during the system self-check after turning the key in the steering lock to
position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 172)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
Controls in detail
Useful features
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network was not available). The
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the END Button on the
MCS unit.
Information button ¡
When the connection is established, the
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
i
1 Cover
2 Information button ¡
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the MCS display.
While the call is connected, you can
change to navigation menu by pressing
NAVI button on the MCS unit.
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the MCS display. Information
regarding the operation of your vehicle, the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.
177
Controls in detail
Useful features
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning key in the
steering lock to position 2 (together
with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 172)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available).
178
The message INFO CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display.
Information calls can be terminated using the END button on the MCS.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remains illuminated (in red) at any
time, the Tele Aid system has detected
a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or
contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
Upgrade signals
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority.
앫
Automatic emergency – First priority
앫
Manual emergency – Second priority
앫
Roadside assistance – Third priority
앫
Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the respective
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The MCS
system operation will resume.
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
i
Remote door unlock
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the MCS system audio is muted and
the selected mode (radio, tape or CD)
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. A pop-up
window will appear in the MCS display
to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in
progress.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and no
other key is available:
i
The indicator lamp on the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by
a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
using the END button on the MCS unit.
왘
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull
outside handle of the liftgate for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS
display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
179
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
The SOS button will flash and the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the MCS
display to indicate receipt of the door
unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a
Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the outside liftgate handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pressing the outside
liftgate handle again.
180
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact
the local law enforcement and you. The
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects
are out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage.
Remote control integrated into the
overhead control panel
1
Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)
2
Hand-held transmitter button
3,4,5 Signal transmitter button
6
Indicator lamp
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
181
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
For operation in the USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
182
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
Step 3:
왘
Step 1:
왘
Switch on ignition.
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed an
integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 3 and 5 and release
them only when the indicator light begins to flash after approximately 20
seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control transmitter 1 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 6 in view.
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter
button 2 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4
or 5). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 6 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
i
Rolling code programming
The indicator lamp 6 flashes the first
time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after 20 seconds.
If the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly
for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 5:
Step 7:
왘
왘
When the indicator lamp 6 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
왘
Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and
observe the indicator lamp 6.
If the indicator lamp 6 stays on constantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener opera컄컄
tor’s manual.
183
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄Step
왘
9:
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Step 12:
Gate operator/Canadian programming
왘
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.
Step 10:
왘
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4
or 5).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
184
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4
or 5).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 4:
Erasing the remote control memory
왘
왘
왘
Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (3,
4 or 5) while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 1 every two seconds
until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 6 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Operation of remote control
왘
왘
왘
Switch on ignition.
Simultaneously hold down the signal
transmitter buttons 3 and 5, for approximately 20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
Reprogramming a single integrated
signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘
Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (3, 4 or 5). Do not release the button.
왘
The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Switch on ignition.
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (3,
4 or 5 to activate the remote controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
185
Controls in detail
Useful features
Trip computer*
i
Setting the date
The trip computer is located in the
overhead console.
With engine not running, the display
switches off automatically 30 seconds
after the last entry.
왘
Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the
date appears.
왘
Press RESET 1.
The month shown flashes.
Selecting functions
왘
Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
month.
The functions are displayed in the following order:
왘
Press RESET 1.
앫
Date
왘
앫
Compass
Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
day.
앫
Stop watch
왘
Press RESET 1.
앫
Present fuel consumption
앫
Average fuel consumption
앫
Distance remaining
앫
Country
앫
Switching off trip computer
왘
1 RESET
2 MODE
3 Display
Switching on the trip computer
왘
Switch on ignition.
Display 3 shows one of the available
functions.
왘
If a function display does not appear,
press MODE 2.
186
Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the
desired display appears.
The day shown flashes.
The year shown flashes.
왘
Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
year.
왘
Press RESET 1.
The display stops flashing and the date
is set.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Compass
The compass displays the direction the vehicle is traveling. The display 3 will show
you N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
i
The presence of buildings, bridges,
power lines and large antenna masts
can influence the displayed values. Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the
vehicle can influence the accuracy of
the compass.
To ensure the display is correct, the compass must be set to the proper geographic
zone (컄 page 188). It may also be necessary to calibrate the compass
(컄 page 188).
Zone map North America
Zone map South America
187
Controls in detail
Useful features
Setting the compass zone
Calibrating the compass
왘
Start and run the engine.
왘
Determine the geographical point of
the vehicle with the aid of the zone
maps.
왘
Press MODE 2 (컄 page 186) repeatedly until the compass display appears
in the trip computer display 3.
왘
Switch on the ignition.
If the vehicle was exposed to a significant
magnetic zone, such as high voltage power
lines, the compass may have to be calibrated.
왘
Press RESET 1 and afterwards press
MODE 2.
왘
왘
Press MODE 2 (컄 page 186) repeatedly until the compass display appears
in the trip computer display 3.
왘
앫
Calibrate the compass in an area free
of steel superstructures and power
lines.
앫
Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
exterior lamps, climate control, rear
window defroster etc.).
Press RESET 1 (컄 page 186) to select
the compass zone mode.
The zone selected last is shown in the
display.
왘
To calibrate the compass correctly, observe the following:
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until the
correct compass zone, as determined
from the zone map, is shown in the display.
앫
Do not open or close the
sliding/pop-up roof.
앫
Close doors and liftgate.
Press MODE 2 twice.
i
The new compass zone is activated and
the compass display will be shown.
An open liftgate triggers the
display - - -.
188
In the display appears CAL–.
왘
Press and hold RESET 1 for approximately two seconds.
The calibration mode is activated and
the display shows CAL.
왘
Drive without interruption two full circles at a speed between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 7 mph (10 km/h).
The message CAL goes out after a short
time. The calibration is now complete.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Stopping
If CAL remains in the display, calibration
was not successfully completed. You
have to recalibrate:
왘
앫
Remove the key from the steering
lock.
왘
앫
Start the vehicle and start the calibration procedure described previously.
We recommend that you have the compass calibrated at a Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Stop watch
왘
Press MODE 2 (컄 page 186) repeatedly until the stop watch display appears in the trip computer display 3.
Press RESET 1 again to stop counting.
Resetting
Press and hold RESET 1 until the display shows “0:00”.
Average fuel consumption
왘
Press MODE 2 (컄 page 186) repeatedly until the average fuel consumption
display appears in the trip computer
display 3.
Distance remaining with fuel presently
in tank
왘
Press MODE 2 (컄 page 186) repeatedly until the distance remaining display appears in the trip computer
display 3.
i
When the fuel supply drops to reserve
level the display flashes distance remaining.
앫
USA only:
The display alternates between
FUEL and distance remaining until
supply is consistently below the reserve level. When the fuel supply is
very low [approximately 1.5 gal
(5.5 l)] FUEL is displayed
continuously.
Counting
왘
Press RESET 1 (컄 page 186) to start
counting.
189
Controls in detail
Useful features
Country
왘
왘
Press MODE 2 (컄 page 186) repeatedly until the country display appears
in the trip computer display 3.
Press and hold RESET 1 a minimum of
five seconds to change the country unit
system.
Setting CAN-English
Setting CAN-French
왘
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is
displayed.
왘
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is
displayed.
왘
Press MODE 2 to select –ENG.
왘
Press MODE 2.
왘
Press MODE 2 again to set CAN-English.
Canada units system selection
You can choose between CAN-English or
CAN-French.
–ENG is displayed.
왘
Press RESET 1 to select –Fr.
왘
Press MODE 2 to set CAN-French.
The language selected determines how the
various displays are presented, see table.
Display
Language
Date
Cardinal points
Fuel consumption
Distance remaining
GEr
German
DD.MM
Süd, Nord, Ost, West
l/100 km
Kilometer
GB
English
MM.DD
South, North, East, West mi/gal (Imperial)
Miles
ESP
Spain
DD.MM
Sur, Norte, Este, Oeste
l/100 km
Kilometer
Fr
French
DD.MM
Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest
l/100 km
Kilometer
USA
American
MM.DD
South, North, East, West mi/gal (US)
Miles
CAN-ENG
American
MM.DD
South, North, East, West l/100 km
Kilometer
CAN-Fr
French
DD.MM
Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest
l/100 km
Kilometer
GEr
German
DD.MM
Süd, Nord, Ost, West
l/100 km
Kilometer
190
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
191
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
왔 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
192
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when the
first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine, the transfer case, the front differential or the rear differential has been
replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures
앫
Remove unnecessary loads
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine is not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
193
Operation
Driving instructions
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
194
!
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 78).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on and there is no audible warning (EBP), the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Operation
Driving instructions
Install only brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps
prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
195
Operation
Driving instructions
Parking
Warning!
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, always turn front
wheels towards the curb.
196
G
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle powertrain, as a result of vehicle/ trailer movement, always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Shift gear selector lever to position N.
앫
Have a second person place wheel
chocks on downhill side of left and right
trailer wheels.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal and let vehicle and trailer roll into chocks until
stopped.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move gear selector lever to position P.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
Operation
Driving instructions
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water on
the road, hydroplaning may occur even at
low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance as compared with summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
197
Operation
Driving instructions
!
ML 350
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
injury and possible death, for you and for
others.
198
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
ML 500
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“V”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
i
For information on speed ratings for
winter tires, see “Winter tires”
(컄 page 230).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 231).
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Do not engage the transfer case in position
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
speeds below 18 mph (30 km / h) vehicle
steering is adversely affected by the LOW
RANGE - ABS (컄 page 77).
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Warning!
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see "Winter driving"
(컄 page 230).
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
199
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water
Off-road driving
Warning!
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
200
Warning!
G
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear.
Do not drive along the side of a slope (danger of vehicle rollover). The vehicle might
otherwise rollover. If in doing so the vehicle
begins to show a tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity (straight up
or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
use only the service brake.
G
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
friction property can cause exceptional wear
and tear as well as brake failure.
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up
and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
full braking power may not be available in an
emergency.
Read this chapter carefully before you begin off-road travel.
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle characteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving. We recommend that you start out with
easy off-road travel.
Operation
Driving instructions
Special driving features for off-road
driving
The following driving features are available
for specific kind of operation:
앫
LOW RANGE mode (컄 page 125)
앫
LOW RANGE – ABS (컄 page 77)
앫
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS (컄 page 80)
앫
LOW RANGE – ESP (컄 page 81)
Off-road driving rules
Engage the LOW RANGE mode before driving under off-road conditions
(컄 page 125).
Fasten items being carried as securely as
possible (컄 page 157).
i
We recommend keeping doors, liftgate,
windows, and sliding/pop-up roof*
closed whenever driving in off-road
mode.
!
앫
In sandy soil, please drive at a
steady speed as allowed by conditions. This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces
the likelihood of the vehicle sinking
into the ground.
앫
Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It interrupts the forward momentum of the vehicle.
앫
Always drive onto slopes with the
the engine running and the vehicle
in gear.
Observe the following during off-road
driving:
앫
Adjust vehicle speed to condition of
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
steeper the terrain, the lower the
speed should be
앫
Watch out for obstacles, such as
rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
앫
Be especially careful when driving
in unknown territory. It may be necessary to get out of the vehicle and
scout the path you intend to take.
앫
Before driving through water, determine is depth.
앫
Do not stop vehicle while immersed
in water, and do not shut off the
engine.
Checklist before off-road driving
Tires
앫
Check the tread depth and maintain
specified tire pressure (see tire pressure label inside the fuel filler flap).
앫
Check tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects.
앫
Replace missing valve caps.
201
Operation
Driving instructions
Rims
Slope angle
앫
1 25°
2 26°
Dented or bent rims can cause tire
pressure loss and damage the tire
beads. For this reason, check and, if
necessary, change rims before driving
off-road.
Vehicle tool kit
앫
Check if the vehicle jack is functional.
앫
In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on
sandy soil) with you.
앫
앫
앫
Driving in steep terrain
앫
202
Switch to LOW RANGE mode before
starting to drive up or down steep inclines (컄 page 125).
앫
Utilize the engine’s braking power
when descending a slope, observe the
engine speed (do not overview the engine). Apply the service brake as needed.
앫
Check the brakes after a lengthy downgrade drive.
Driving on embankments, slopes and
other steep inclines should only be
done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the
line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 60% grade.
Do not drive along the side of a slope
(danger of vehicle rollover). If in doing
so, the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll, immediately steer into a
line of gravity (straight up or downhill).
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over,
never turn it around on steep inclines.
If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse
gear.
i
Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive
with moderate engine speeds
(max. 3000 RPM).
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the automatic transmission (컄 page 121).
Traction in steep terrain
앫
Be easy on the accelerator and watch
for continuous wheel traction when
driving in steep terrain.
The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting
out on a steep incline when the front
wheels have then the tendency to slip
due to the weight shifting away the
front axle.
Operation
Driving instructions
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and
limits the torque for the front wheels by
braking them. Simultaneously the
torque for the rear wheels is increased.
Driving downhill
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 121).
앫
Drive downhill observing the same
rules as driving uphill (컄 page 202).
앫
The special LOW RANGE – ABS setting
allows for precise and brief (cyclical)
blocking of the front wheels, permitting
them to dig into loose ground.
Driving across a hilltop
앫
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do
not select gear range N), to prevent the
vehicle from speeding up too much after climbing a hill.
Use the momentum of the vehicle to
drive across the hilltop.
Driving in this manner prevents the vehicle from jumping across the hilltop
and thus loosing its forward momentum.
Remember that the front wheels when
stopped, slide across a surface, thus
loose their ability to steer the vehicle.
Driving through water
1 20 in (50 cm)
앫
Before driving through water, determine its depth.
It should not be deeper than approximately 20 inches (50 cm).
Make sure you check the water bed.
The ground surface may not be firm
which may result in deeper waters than
expected when driving the vehicle
through it.
앫
Switch to LOW RANGE mode before
driving through water (컄 page 125).
203
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
Switch off the exterior lamps as well as
the climate control.
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 121).
앫
Enter the water only at a shallow spot,
driving at walking speed.
!
Never accelerate before driving into
the water. The bow wave could force
water into the engine and auxiliary
equipment, thus damaging them.
앫
Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
There is a very high level of driving resistance in water. The surface is slippery and may not be firm, making
pulling away in water difficult and dangerous.
앫
Clean mud off the tire tread after driving through water.
204
앫
To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
brake pedal several times after leaving
the water.
Crossing obstacles
!
Obstacles can damage the vehicle
undercarriage or suspension components. If possible use the assistance of
a second person outside the vehicle to
scout the path you intend to take and
check for adequate ground clearance
when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The person assisting you outside
the vehicle should always be a safe distance away from the vehicle and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt
in case of any unexpected vehicle
movement.
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
especially vehicle undercarriage and
suspension components. Failure to do
so can adversely affect the vehicle's future performance, including increased
chance of an accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
Check the vehicle clearance before
crossing obstacles.
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 121).
앫
Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of
the front wheels at the center of the obstacle, and repeat same with the rear
wheel.
!
Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a
result of its possible slanted position
which in turn may result in the vehicle
tipping or rolling over.
Ruts
A number of off-road tracks or other byways have deep ruts which can cause the
undercarriage to come in contact with the
ground.
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 121).
앫
Drive next to the ruts rather than
through them if at all possible.
Returning from off-road driving
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
205
Operation
Driving instructions
Off-road driving increases strain on the
vehicle.
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle for possible damage after each off-road
trip. Recognizing any damage and a subsequent timely repair reduces the chance of
a possible breakdown or accident later on.
앫
Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses,
etc., as well as vehicle underbody for
possible damage.
앫
Check tires for possible damage, clean
all exterior lamps, and conduct a brake
test.
앫
Proceed as follows:
앫
Switch off the LOW RANGE mode
(컄 page 125).
앫
Remove excessive dirt from tires,
wheels, wheel housings, and underbody.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean
the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
and wheels from extreme dirt using a
strong jet of water.
206
Check for brush or branches caught in
the undercarriage.
They could increase the possibility of a
fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake
lines, puncture rubber bellows of the
axles or drive shafts.
앫
After continued operation in mud,
sand, water or other dirty conditions
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
pads and check and clean axle joints.
Trailer towing
Warning!
G
Failure to use proper equipment and driving
technique can result in a loss of vehicle control when towing a trailer.
Improper towing or failure to follow the instructions contained in this guide can result
in serious injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully to assure safe trailer operation.
Ask your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center should you require an explanation of information contained in this guide.
Operation
Driving instructions
Trailer hitches
Electrical connections
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings
앫
The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-wire harness included in the
Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch receiver kit.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
maximum permissible vehicle weight:
6614 lbs (3000 kg).
Only install a trailer hitch receiver approved for your vehicle.
For information on availability and installation, see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
The bumpers on your vehicle are not
designed for use with clamp-type hitches.
Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them.
앫
To reduce the possibility of damage, remove the hitch ball adaptor from the
receiver when not in use.
An additional four-pole conversion plug is
included in the Mercedes-Benz supplied
trailer hitch receiver kit.
For further information, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW):
Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel,
tools, spare wheel, installed accessories,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It
must never exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum permissible axle weight:
front
rear
2976 lbs
3858 lbs
(1350 kg)
(1750 kg)
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the maximum permissible trailer weight to be
towed:
5000 lbs (2260 kg).
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
maximum permissible weight on the trailer
tongue:
500 lbs (225 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz
approved hitch receiver.
207
Operation
Driving instructions
Loading a trailer
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
Attaching a trailer
앫
앫
Observe maximum permitted trailer
dimensions (width and length).
When loading a trailer, you should observe that neither the permissible GTW,
nor the GVWR are exceeded.
Maximum permissible values are listed
on the safety compliance certification
labels for the vehicle and for the trailer
to be towed.
The lowest value listed must be selected when determining how the vehicle
and trailer are loaded.
앫
The tongue weight at the hitch ball
must be added to the GVW to prevent
exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow
vehicle’s rear GAWR.
i
We recommend loading the trailer in
such a manner that it has a tongue
weight (TW) between 10% and 15% of
the GTW.
208
앫
To assure that the tow vehicle and trailer are in compliance with the maximum
permissible weight limits have the loaded rig (tow vehicle including driver, passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a commercial scale.
Most states and all Canadian provinces
require
앫
Check the vehicle’s front and rear
Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the GTW and
TW.
safety chains between your tow vehicle
and the trailer.
The chains should be crisscrossed under the trailer tongue. They must be attached to the hitch receiver, and not to
the vehicle’s bumper or axle.
The values as measured must not be
exceeded, according to the weight listed under “Vehicle and trailer weight
and ratings”.
Be sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
앫
a separate brake system at various
trailer weights.
앫
a break-away switch on trailers with a
separate brake system.
The switch activates the trailer brakes
in the possible event that the trailer
might separate from the tow vehicle.
Operation
Driving instructions
!
Towing a trailer
Do not connect a trailer brake system
(if trailer is so equipped) directly to the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as
your vehicle is equipped with antilock
brakes. If you do, neither the vehicle’s
brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will function properly.
There are many different laws, including
speed limit restrictions, having to do with
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only for where you reside, but also
for where you will be driving. A good
source for this information can be the police or local authorities.
i
Note the following points, when driving
with the trailer:
The provided vehicle electrical wiring
harness for trailer towing has a brake
signal wire (color orange) for hook-up
to a brake controller.
You should consider using a trailer
sway control system. For further information see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
앫
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you
should practice turning, stopping and
backing up in an area which is free from
traffic.
Before you start driving check the
앫
trailer hitch
앫
break-away switch
앫
safety chains
앫
electrical connections
앫
lighting and tires
Adjust the mirrors to permit unobstructed
view beyond rear of trailer.
앫
If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving slowly,
and then apply only the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working properly.
앫
Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shifts while driving.
앫
When towing a trailer, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure,
and that lighting and trailer brakes (if
so equipped) are functioning properly.
앫
Take into consideration that when towing a trailer, the handling characteristics are different and less stable from
those when operating the vehicle without a trailer.
It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
209
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
The vehicle and trailer combination is
heavier, and therefore is limited in acceleration and climbing ability, and requires longer stopping distances.
It is more prone to reacting to side wind
gusts, and requires more sensitive
steering input.
앫
If possible, do not brake abruptly, but
rather engage the brake slightly at first
to permit the trailer to activate its
brake. Then increase the braking force.
!
If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce the vehicle’s speed and use the
brake controller by hand to straighten
out the vehicle and trailer.
In no case should you attempt to
straighten out the tow vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed or oversteering and stepping on the brakes.
210
앫
If the transmission hunts between
gears on inclines, manually shift to a
lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1).
앫
A lower gear and reduction of speed reduces the chance of engine overloading and/or overheating.
앫
On very steep inclines, not manageable
with gear selector lever in position 1,
switch transfer case to LOW RANGE
mode (컄 page 125).
앫
When going down a long hill, shift into
a lower gear and use the engine’s braking effect.
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating the vehicle and trailer brakes.
If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature (coolant temperature needle approaching the red
zone) when the air conditioning is on,
turn off the air conditioning system.
Engine coolant heat can be additionally
vented by opening the windows,
switching the climate control fan speed
to high and setting the temperature
control to the maximum hot position.
앫
Extreme care must be exercised since
your vehicle with a trailer will require
additional passing distance ahead than
when driving without a trailer.
Because your vehicle and trailer is
longer than your vehicle alone, you will
also need to go much farther ahead of
the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Operation
Driving instructions
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Driving abroad
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. Always use the partition net when transporting cargo. Partition
net cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in
the cargo floor area and fastening materials.
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directory, you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Control and operation of radio transmitters
MCS, radio and telephone*
Warning!
G
Do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the
MCS, radio or telephone1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every
second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
211
Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones and two-way radios
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
212
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible legal limits.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments
should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be
Operation
Driving instructions
carried out regularly according to
Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise to approx. 248°F
(120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature in the red zone.
Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
213
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
The fuel filler flap is located on the
left-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
214
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
!
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Fuel cap
왘
Remove the key from the steering lock.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap 1 by pulling in
direction of the arrow.
왘
Turn the fuel cap 2 to the left and hold
on to it until possible pressure is released.
왘
Take off the cap.
To prevent damaging the lens of the
plastic tail lamp, make certain that no
gasoline comes into contact with it.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
Close the fuel filler flap.
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ? lamp to illuminate.
i
See also “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 248).
You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.
왘
i
Check regularly and before a long trip
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 217)
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
1 Engine oil level
2 Coolant level
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). More information
on the coolant level can be found in the
“Operation” section (컄 page 222).
3 Brake fluid
4 Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
More information on filling the reservoir can be found in the “Operation”
section (컄 page 224).
215
Operation
At the gas station
!
Vehicle lighting
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center immediately. Do not add
brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see
“Practical Hints” (컄 page 245).
Check function and cleanliness. More information on replacing light bulbs can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 266).
Engine oil level
More information on engine oil see “Engine
oil” (컄 page 218).
216
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄 page 227).
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
왘
Hood
Warning!
Pull release lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 protrudes slightly from the radiator-grille.
If not, lift the hood slightly.
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening
왘
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
컄컄
1 Release lever
2 Handle for opening the hood
왘
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of the
radiator-grille.
217
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
218
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
왘
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
!
Do not push the hood closed manually,
as this could damage it.
i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level via display
왘
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
Wait until the display ------ appears in
the speedometer display 2.
왘
Within one second press button 1
twice.
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the display:
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
앫
To check the engine oil level via the display
in the speedometer, do the following:
왘
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2.
앫
OIL HI
The oil level is too high.
The oil level is correct. Engine oil
does not to be added.
왘
– 1.0 L
Add 1.0 liter of engine oil.
– 1.5 L
왘
앫
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear in the
display:
OIL i.O
왘
앫
Other display messages
Add 1.5 liters of engine oil.
Have excess oil siphoned.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
– 2.0 L
왘
Add 2.0 liters of engine oil.
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 302).
1 Button
2 Display in speedometer
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 300) and (컄 page 301).
219
Operation
Engine compartment
The display ------ flashes in the
speedometer display, if a proper oil level
check cannot be performed.
왘
왘
If engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait five minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If engine is not yet at normal operating
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
The engine oil level can be checked by
either the oil dipstick or via the
speedometer display in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 219). The amount of
engine oil needed is shown more
precisely in the speedometer display.
Perform the engine oil level check with
the dipstick if it cannot be completed
via the speedometer display
(컄 page 220).
See the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 253) if the low engine oil level
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes.
220
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately three seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
i
i
In this case we recommend that you
have the system checked at a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 217).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 (컄 page 221).
Oil dipstick
The oil level is correct when it is between
the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
the oil dipstick.
Operation
Engine compartment
i
The filling quantity between the upper
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 221).
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 300) and (컄 page 301).
See the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 253) if the low engine oil level
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes.
Adding engine oil
!
Only use approved engine oils. For a
listing of approved engine oils, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific
Mercedes-Benz specification
(e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is
printed on the oil filler cap, only use an
engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the
specification indicated on the oil filler
cap. Using engine oils of other specification may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval
and will result in engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
1 Oil dipstick
2 Filler cap
왘
Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
컄컄
entering the ground or water.
221
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 300) and (컄 page 301).
222
Transmission fluid level
Warning!
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center check the automatic transmission.
G
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Coolant
앫
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
앫
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
Operation
Engine compartment
1 Cap
2 COLD LEVEL mark
The coolant level should reach the COLD
LEVEL mark 2 in the reservoir.
i
If the engine is already at its regular operating temperature, the coolant may
be approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above
the COLD LEVEL mark.
왘
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 304).
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compartment.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center about steps you need to observe.
all safety instructions
G Observe
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
A Risk of explosion
flames or sparks away
D Keep
from battery. Do not smoke.
acid is caustic. Do not
B Battery
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
223
Operation
Engine compartment
E
C
F
Wear eye protection.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Keep children away.
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards
(arrow).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
!
1 Cap
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of 8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
224
왘
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer
fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
the headlamps.
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 307).
225
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims
and tires are mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
앫
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed.
226
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation.
Important guidelines
앫
Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire pressure loss or damage to
the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first.
Operation
Tires and wheels
!
!
When the wheels are heavily soiled,
e.g. after driving through mud, clean
the inside of the wheels with a jet of
water.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
앫
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Life of tire
Direction of rotation
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
227
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
228
Warning!
G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) as
indicated on the certification label on the
driver’s door pillar. Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Rotating wheels
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size,
The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to
6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km) or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of
tire wear. The same direction of tire rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
229
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This
service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 307).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started even at
low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
230
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP, 4-ETS, and
EBP in winter operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all winter
tires mounted are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block
heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Observe the following guidelines when
using snow chains:
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
Snow chains should only be used on all
four wheels. With only two chains available, they should be mounted on the
rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
앫
Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will be glad to advise you on this
subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄 page 81) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle’s traction.
231
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
times called for by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times /mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
Clearing the service indicator
1 Knob
2 Display in the speedometer
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, the type of service is indicated in the speedometer display 2:
9
Minor service (A)
½
Major service (B)
The following information, depending on
operating conditions throughout the year,
is also shown:
232
앫
calculated distance remaining
앫
calculated remaining time in days
The service indicator is automatically
cleared after ten seconds when you switch
on the ignition or when reaching the service threshold while driving. You can also
clear it yourself.
왘
Press knob 1.
Operation
Maintenance
Service term exceeded
Resetting the service indicator
If you have exceeded the suggested service term:
In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you
can reset the service indicator yourself.
앫
앫
the 9 or ½ symbol appears in
the display 2 for 30 seconds and a
signal sounds after switching on the
ignition.
it is preceded by a “–” (minus symbol).
The Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will
reset the service indicator following a completed service.
Calling up the service indicator
왘
왘
The present status for days or distance
is displayed.
왘
왘
Within one second press knob 1
twice.
The FSS display will appear for
ten seconds.
Switch ignition on and immediately
press knob 1 twice within
one second.
Within ten seconds turn the key in
steering lock to position 0 (컄 page 33).
Press and hold knob 1 while switching the ignition on.
The present status for days or distance
is displayed once more.
왘
Continue to hold knob 1.
After approximately ten seconds a signal sounds, and the display shows
10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km) for
approximately ten seconds.
왘
i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing the proper service
as called for by the FSS will cause the
FSS to incorrectly determine the next
service interval which will result in engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
Release knob 1.
233
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
앫
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
234
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet entitled “Vehicle Care Guide”.
Power washer
Paintwork, painted body components
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle, always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
!
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
235
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should
be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo.
236
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Ornamental moldings
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not
attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry
cloth or sponge.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the steering lock.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Wiper blades
왘
Fold wiper arm forward.
Warning!
1 Parktronic system sensors
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean the
sensors 1.
When using a steam cleaner or power
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at
sensors 1.
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key from steering lock before cleaning
the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor
might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Window cleaning
왘
Fold wiper arms forward.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key from steering lock before cleaning
the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor
might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
왘
Use a window cleaning solution on all
glass surfaces. An automotive glass
cleaner is recommended.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
237
Operation
Vehicle care
!
Instrument cluster
Hard plastic trim items
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the steering lock.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
i
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.
238
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Headliner and rear window shelf
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery
MB Tex upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that has the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Leather upholstery*
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
239
240
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
241
Practical hints
What to do if …
왔 What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when
turning the key in steering lock to
position 2, have it checked and replaced if
necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS, ESP, 4-ETS and EBP
are also switched off.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking
reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
-
The yellow ABS warning lamp
comes on while driving.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
왘
242
If necessary, have the generator
(alternator) and the battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
7
Possible cause
The indicator lamp comes on.
A BabySmart
child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. The front passenger
airbag is therefore switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
7
Suggested solution
TM1
The indicator lamp does not light The system is malfunctioning.
up with a BabySmartTM child
seat properly installed on the
front passenger seat.
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat
(컄 page 67).
왘
If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1
Baby SmartTM is trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
243
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 47).
É
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
É
The red brake warning lamp
You are driving with the parking brake set.
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
244
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
É
-
¿
Possible cause
The red brake warning lamp
There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brake
comes on in addition to the yel- Proportioning (EBP) system.
low ABS malfunction lamp and
The enhanced braking effect is not available.
you hear a warning sound.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The self-diagnosis has not been completed.
Suggested solution
왘
Have the system checked immediately at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.
The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp
will go out after driving a short distance at
more than approx.12 mph (20 km/h).
245
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
¿
Possible cause
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
Suggested solution
The ESP is no longer synchronized following Synchronize the ESP:
a voltage supply interruption (e.g. battery dis- 왘 With vehicle stationary and the engine
connected or discharged).
running, turn the steering wheel
completely to the left and then to the
right.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator
lamp does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.
246
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
¿
¿
Possible cause
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
Suggested solution
The charging voltage has fallen below
When the voltage is above this value
10 volts. The BAS and the ESP have switched again, the BAS and ESP are operational
off.
again.
The BAS or the ESP is malfunctioning.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and
the battery checked.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the BAS/ESP checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
247
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
?
The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction of:
왘
앫
The fuel management system
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 214).
Your fuel tank is empty.
왘
After refuelling start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
248
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
/
Possible cause
왘
Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
왘
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary (컄 page 222).
If the warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The coolant level is too low.
왘
Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
왘
Add coolant to prevent engine from
overheating (컄 page 222).
왘
If the coolant temperature is below
the red zone, drive on to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The yellow coolant warning lamp The coolant is to hot.
comes on when the engine is
The coolant level is too low.
running.
The coolant temperature gauge is above
248°F (120°C).
Suggested solution
If the coolant level is correct, the electrical
radiator fan may be broken.
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
249
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
250
!
Do not ignore the coolant warning
lamps. Extended driving with the symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant. The engine will overheat,
causing major engine damage.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
v
v
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning
lamp comes on steady while
driving.
The ESP is deactivated.
왘
The yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning
lamp flashes while driving.
The ESP or 4-ETS has come into operation
because of detected traction loss in at least
one tire.
Switch the ESP back on (컄 page 82).
Risk of accident!
If the ESP cannot be switched back on,
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
ing road and weather conditions.
as soon as possible.
왘
During take-off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
왘
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄 page 81).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.
251
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
{
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow ETS malfunction indi- 4-ETS has switched off to prevent overheat- As soon as the brakes have cooled off,
cator lamp comes on while driv- ing of the brakes. Also see 4-ETS/ESP warn- 4-ETS switches on again.
ing.
ing lamp (컄 page 251).
The indicator lamp goes out.
4-ETS is malfunctioning and has switched off.
왘
Have the 4-ETS checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
ê
The yellow LOW RANGE indicator The gear selection conditions have not been
lamp flashes after one or more adhered to.
switching conditions.
왘
Repeat the gear selection process
(컄 page 125).
ê
The yellow LOW RANGE indicator LOW RANGE mode is malfunctioning.
lamp flashes after switching the
ignition on.
Have the LOW RANGE mode checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 214).
왘
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 214).
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
The yellow fuel tank reserve
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
warning lamp flashes when leaving the engine running.
252
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
:
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow warning lamp flashes The engine oil level has sunk to the minimum
after starting the engine or while level. If the engine oil level continues to sink,
driving.
the warning lamp will light up.
왘
Add approved oil at the next gas
station (컄 page 302).
왘
If oil loss is visible on the engine, have
the malfunction corrected as soon as
possible at a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
_
The red indicator lamp does not The adjustable telescoping steering column
go out after starting the engine. is not properly locked.
왘
Lock the adjustable steering column
(컄 page 39).
‡
The green front fog lamp indica- The front fog lamps are switched on.
tor lamp lights up when ignition
is turned on.
왘
Fog lamps (컄 page 111).
<
The red seat belt warning lamp
illuminates for a brief period
after starting the engine.
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.
왘
Fasten your seat belt (컄 page 64).
W
The yellow low washer system There is approximately 1.3 US qt. (1.25 l) of
fluid level lamp comes on after washer fluid remaining in the reservoir.
starting the engine or while driv- The washer fluid may have frozen.
ing.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 224).
왘
Move the vehicle to a warmer environment so that the washer fluid will
thaw.
왘
Correct the concentration level after
the washer fluid in the reservoir
thaws.
253
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
#
The red charge indicator lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The battery is no longer charging.
왘
Possible causes:
앫
alternator malfunctioning
앫
broken poly-V-belt
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken
왘
Do not continue to drive, before the
poly-V-belt is replaced.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
2
The yellow brake indicator lamp The brake pads are worn down.
comes on during braking or after
starting the engine.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service booklet.
254
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
1
Possible cause
The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sysup while driving.
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning!
Suggested solution
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in
an accident/or injury to you or to others.
255
Practical hints
What to do if …
Additional indicators in the speedometer display
Display
Possible cause
Suggested solution
9
Perform minor service (A) (컄 page 232).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to perform service.
´
Perform major service (B) (컄 page 232).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to perform service.
Á
î
The immobilizer is not operational.
왘
Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
256
The StArt message comes on in
addition to the Error message.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the cargo
area behind the right trim panel.
The first aid kit is stored in the liftgate.
3 Screw
4 Vehicle jack with tool kit
1 Handles
2 Panel
왘
왘
Open and fold down panel 1.
The first aid kit can be removed.
왘
Turn handles 1 90° in direction of
arrows.
Fold down the panel 2.
왘
Turn screw 3 counterclockwise.
왘
Remove vehicle jack.
Vehicles with CD-changer*
(컄 page 258).
The jack is exclusively designed for lifting
the vehicle during a wheel change. Always
lower the vehicle on sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehicle.
257
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle jack
Please also observe the safety guidelines
in the “Flat tire” section (컄 page 274)
when using the jack.
Warning!
1 Vehicle jack
2 Wheel bolt wrench
3 Screwdriver
4 Interchangeable slot
Screwdriver 3 is placed inside the wheelbolt wrench handle.
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface.
258
Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated
in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower
the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.
Vehicle with CD-changer*
To access the vehicle tool kit, swing the
CD-changer out of the panel.
1 Screw
2 CD-changer
왘
Turn screw 1 counterclockwise.
왘
Swing the CD-changer 2 out of the
panel.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel (space-saver tire)
Removing spare wheel
Use the spare wheel only temporarily,
while observing the following restrictions:
앫
Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
Drive to the nearest repair facility to
have the flat tire repaired or replaced
as appropriate.
앫
Warning!
G
Exercise care when removing or installing
spare wheel to prevent personal injury.
The spare wheel is located behind the rear
bumper.
2 Screw
3 Spare wheel carrier
4 Lever
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel.
i
Please comply with the instructions for
“Mounting the spare wheel”
(컄 page 274).
왘
Turn screw 2 counterclockwise using
the wrench (컄 page 258).
Screw 2 remains in spare wheel
carrier 3.
왘
Lift spare wheel carrier slightly and
push lever 4 to the right using screwdriver (컄 page 257).
왘
Swing spare wheel carrier 3 down and
컄컄
pull it out from under the bumper.
1 Cover
왘
Hold left and right side of cover 1 and
pull away from bumper.
259
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
컄컄
!
When storing the space-saver spare
wheel in its holder, secure it using the
bayonet lock.
5 Bayonet lock
왘
Turn the bayonet lock 5 90° to the
left.
왘
Pull off bayonet lock 5.
왘
Remove the spare wheel cover and the
spare wheel.
왘
Store bayonet lock 5 and spare wheel
cover in cargo area.
왘
Replace the spare wheel carrier and secure it in place.
왘
Install cover 1 to the bumper.
260
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
i
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking and opening the driver’s
door with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door using the remote control, open the
door using the key.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
remote control.
앫
Insert the key in the steering lock.
2 Unlocking
3 Locking
1 Release button
왘
Press release button 1 on the remote
control.
왘
Remove the protective cap from the
door lock.
왘
Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
The key folds out.
261
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the remote control, lock it with the mechanical key as follows:
왘
Close the passenger doors and the liftgate.
왘
Press the upper part of the central
locking button in the cockpit
(컄 page 93).
왘
Changing batteries in the remote
control
i
If the batteries in the remote control are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Warning!
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
G
Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the passenger doors are still
visible. If necessary push them down
manually.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
왘
Lock the liftgate if necessary from inside (컄 page 91).
왘
Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
1 Release button
2 Battery cover
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
262
Unfold the key by pressing release
button 1.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘
Pull off battery cover 2 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Remove the batteries.
Synchronizing remote control
왘
Turn key in steering lock to position 2
(컄 page 33), then to position 0 and remove.
왘
Within ten seconds, push and hold
button ‹ while pushing
button Πfive times.
왘
Release the button, and press ‹,
Œ or Š once.
Fuel filler flap
The remote control is resynchronized.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
Press battery cover 2 onto housing
until locked in place.
Push each button to assure proper operation of the remote control.
Recheck all of the remote control functions.
i
If it is not possible to resynchronize the
remote control, have the system
checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
1 Cover
2 Lock rod
왘
Open the tailgate.
왘
Open cover 1 in cargo area behind
the left trim panel.
왘
Turn lock rod 2 clockwise (arrow) to
the end stop.
The fuel filler flap can now be opened.
If remote control does not function correctly after replacing the batteries, the
system may have to be resynchronized.
263
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Manually unlocking the transmission
gear selector lever
In the case of power failure the transmission gear selector lever can be manually
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
왘
Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into
the covered opening below the
position D of the shift pattern.
왘
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
왘
왘
Push the pin down.
왘
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
Remove pin 1.
The cover returns to its closed position
after moving the gear selector lever to
position D.
i
1 Pin
264
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
Sliding/pop-up roof*
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
왘
Pry off cover 3 using a flat blade
srewdriver.
왘
Obtain crank 2.
왘
Insert crank 2 through hole.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located
behind the cover between the front interior
lamps.
i
Push crank 2 upward while turning it,
to disengage the electric motor.
왘
왘
1 Hexagon drive hole
2 Crank
3 Cover
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
앫
slide roof closed
앫
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
앫
slide roof open
앫
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up roof must be synchronized if it has been operated manually
(컄 page 149).
265
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for headlamp adjustment.
i
If the headlamps are fogged up on the
inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance should clear
out the fogging.
266
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Type
1 Fog lamp
H8 (35 W)
2 High beam
H7 (55 W)
3 Low beam
H7 (55 W)
Xenon* D2S-35 W
4 Turn signal,
parking, standing and side
marker lamp
1157 NA
(32/3 cp bulb)
5 Additional turn
signal
LED
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp
6 Brake lamp
Notes on bulb replacement
Type
1073
(32 cp bulb)
7 Backup lamp
1073
(32 cp bulb)
8 Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
Warning!
G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
9 Tail, parking and
P 21/4 W
standing lamp
Rear fog lamp, driver’s side
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
a Side marker lamp
W5W
b High mounted brake 1073
lamp
(32 cp bulb)
c License plate lamps C 5 W
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
앫
Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
앫
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
앫
Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors
앫
Bi-Xenon lamps*
앫
Front fog lamps (vehicles with sport
package)*
267
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Halogen headlamp
Replacing low beam bulbs
2 Electrical connector
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 217).
왘
Push down tab at top end of cover 1
and remove.
왘
Pull electrical connector 2 off.
왘
Unclip the retainer springs and take out
the bulb.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.
왘
Clip the retainer springs.
왘
Plug the connector 2 onto the bulb.
왘
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
1 Low beam halogen or Bi-Xenon* headlamp cover with locking tab
Warning!
G
Do not remove the cover 1 for the
Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage
in xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace
the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such
work done by a qualified technician.
268
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam bulbs
Turn signal, parking, standing and side
marker lamp bulbs
2 Electrical connector
1 High beam headlamp cover with locking tab
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 217).
왘
Twist cover 1 counterclockwise and
remove.
왘
Pull electrical connector 2 off.
왘
Unclip the retainer springs and take out
the bulb.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.
왘
Clip the retainer springs.
왘
Plug the connector 2 onto the bulb.
왘
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
1 Bulb socket
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 217).
왘
Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘
Reinstall the bulb socket.
컄컄
269
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄왘
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
Fog lamp bulbs
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open liftgate.
2 Bulb socket
3 Tabs
1 Fog lamp
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Use a suitable object (e.g. screwdriver)
to press on the release lever behind the
front panel.
왘
Twist bulb socket 2 counterclockwise
to its end stop and pull out.
왘
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket.
왘
Reinstall bulb socket 2.
왘
Twist bulb socket 2 clockwise to its
end stop.
왘
Reinstall fog lamp into the bumper.
Front fog lamp 1 releases.
왘
Remove fog lamp out of bumper.
Make sure tabs 3 firmly seat into the
slots of holder.
270
1 Screws
2 Tail, parking and standing lamp
Fog lamp, driver’s side
3 Side marker lamp
4 Turn signal lamp
5 Backup lamp
6 Brake lamp
왘
Remove screws 1.
왘
Remove tail lamp.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp
High mounted brake lamp
1 License plate lamp
2 Screws
1 Cover
2 Tab
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise.
Loosen both screws 2 and remove
lamp.
Squeeze both sides of cover 1, fold it
forward and remove.
왘
왘
Reinstall bulb holder. You should hear
it engage.
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
Press tab 2 on reflector and remove
reflector.
왘
Retighten the screws.
왘
Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise.
7 Tabs
왘
Squeeze tabs 7 together and remove
bulb holder.
왘
Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Insert the tail lamp in the body, lower
edge first. Make sure it engages.
Retighten screws with washers on
them.
271
컄컄
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄왘
왘
Insert reflector from the left so that it
engages on the right.
Position tabs of cover in slots and reinstall cover until properly seated.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. To check and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps described:
왘
Park the vehicle on a level surface
25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test
screen or wall.
왘
Switch the headlamps on
(컄 page 110).
Adjusting headlamp aim
If the beam does not show a beam pattern
as indicated in the figure left, then follow
the steps below:
왘
Open hood (컄 page 217).
i
High beam adjustments simultaneously aim the low beam.
272
Always turn adjustment screws 2
and 3 simultaneously for vertical adjustment until the headlamp is adjusted as shown 1. Turn clockwise for
upward movement and counterclockwise for downward movement.
Graduations:
screw 2: 0.50° pitch
screw 3: 0.67° pitch
The left and right headlamps must be adjusted individually.
i
If it is not possible to obtain a proper
headlamp adjustment, have the system
checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
V Vertical centerline
H Headlamp mounting high, measured
from the center
Vehicle should have a normal trunk
load.
왘
2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Removing
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward.
왘
Turn wiper blade at a right angle to wiper arm.
왘
Press safety tab down 2.
!
왘
Push wiper blade downward 1 and remove.
Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward.
Installing
왘
Slide the wiper blade into end of wiper
arm until it locks in place.
왘
Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the
windshield. Make sure you hold onto
the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Wiper blade
2 Safety tab
273
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
G
Preparing the vehicle
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
왘
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to P.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
274
왘
Take the spare wheel out of its carrier
(컄 page 259).
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘
Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
왘
Take the two-piece wheel wrench and
the jack out of the rear compartment
area (컄 page 257). Assemble wheel
wrench.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
왘
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
1 Take-up bracket
2 Jack
왘
Place jack on firm ground.
왘
Position jack 2 under the take-up
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.
왘
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.
!
Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage
to the vehicle.
275
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
왘
Unscrew and remove all wheel bolts.
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘
Grip the wheel from the sides and remove it.
Mounting the new wheel
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘
Install spare wheel on wheel hub.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
276
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
Warning!
G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
Lowering the vehicle
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
왘
Remove the jack.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘
Store jack and tool kit.
1-5 Wheel bolts
i
왘
The removed road wheel cannot be
stored in the spare wheel carrier, but
should be transported in the rear cargo
compartment wrapped in a protective
cover supplied with the vehicle.
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
The protective cover is located in the
rear cargo compartment behind the
cover in the right side trim panel.
277
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment.
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 223).
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the key is in the steering lock. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic
components could be severely damaged.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for further information.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
278
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the key
in the steering lock
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
Removing the batteries
Reconnecting the batteries
왘
Remove the screw securing the battery.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
왘
Remove the battery support and bracket. Take out the battery.
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
왘
Connect the negative lead.
Charging and reinstalling batteries
Never invert the terminal connections!
Warning!
왘
Depress parking brake firmly or move
gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Remove key from the steering lock.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 217).
왘
Disconnect the battery negative lead.
왘
Remove the cover from the positive terminal.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
왘
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
왘
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
279
Practical hints
Battery
i
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):
앫
Set the clock (컄 page 118).
앫
Set the date in trip computer
(컄 page 186).
앫
Calibrate the compass
(컄 page 188).
앫
Resynchronize the ESP
(컄 page 246).
앫
Resynchronize side power windows
(컄 page 146).
앫
Resynchronize sliding/pop-up
roof*(컄 page 149).
280
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle's electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficientcross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
281
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
!
G
왘
Never invert the terminal connections.
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
Now you can turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 223).
왘
Remove the jumper cables first from
the negative terminals 2 and 3 and
then from positive terminals 1
and 4.
The battery is located on the right side of
the engine compartment.
You can now turn on the lights.
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Open the hood.
왘
Connect positive terminals 1 and 4
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to positive terminal 4 of
charged battery first.
282
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery
2 Negative terminal of discharged
battery
3 Negative terminal of charged battery
4 Positive terminal of charged battery
왘
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘
Connect negative terminals 2 and 3
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to negative terminal 3 of
charged battery first.
Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, with key in steering lock turned
to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.
Switch off the ESP (컄 page 81),
tow-away alarm (컄 page 85) and the
automatic central locking (컄 page 93).
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground only so far as necessary to have the
vehicle moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be employed.
!
To be certain to avoid additional damage to the vehicle powertrain, however
you should observe the following:
앫
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the gear selector lever
must be in position N and the key must
be in steering lock position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the vehicle may be
towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised (observe instructions regarding flexible drive shaft), the engine
must be shut off (key in steering lock
position 1). Otherwise, the 4-ETS may
become engaged which may cause loss
of towing control.
앫
앫
With damage to the front axle
앫
raise front axle
앫
remove flexible drive shaft between rear axle and transfer
case
With damage to the rear axle
앫
raise rear axle
앫
tow vehicle with wheel lift or
dolly placed under front wheels
With damage to the transfer case
앫
remove flexible drive shaft to
the drive axles
Always install new self-locking nuts
when reinstalling flexible drive shaft.
283
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the key is in
steering lock position 2.
If the key is left in steering lock position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
key from steering lock and reinsert.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
hazard warning flasher in use, turn key
in steering lock to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right
turn signal in usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
i
The vehicle cannot be started via
tow-start.
284
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the key in steering lock
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel is turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central
locking (컄 page 93).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the towing eye. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension
parts.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
The gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P and the key will not
turn in the steering lock if the battery is
disconnected or discharged. See notes
on the battery (컄 page 278) or on jump
starting (컄 page 281).
Front towing eye
The rear towing eye is located behind the
right side cover in the bumper panel.
The front towing eye is located on the passenger side below the bumper.
Manual unlocking transmission gear
selector lever (컄 page 264).
ML 350, ML 500
1 Towing eye
1 Cover
2 Towing eye
Rear towing eye
To remove cover:
왘
Warning!
G
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is
extremely hot.
Pry out the cover 1 using a flat blade
screwdriver (컄 page 257).
To reinstall cover:
왘
Engage cover at bottom and press in
top securely.
285
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Stranded vehicle
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
be done with the greatest of care, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diagonally, since it could result in damage to the
chassis alignment.
Vehicles with sport package*
1 Cover
2 Towing eye
To remove cover:
왘
Grip cover 1 at bottom and securely
pull out.
To reinstall cover:
왘
Engage cover and press in securely.
286
Never try to free a vehicle that is still coupled to a trailer.
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward
in its own previously made tracks.
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the left-hand side.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The fuse chart is printed on the corresponding fuse box cover. The amperages
of the fuses are also indicated there.
1 Clamps
2 Fuse box cover
Removing/installing cover
왘
Release clamps 1.
왘
Lift fuse box cover 2 up.
왘
Install cover 1 in reverse order.
3 Fuse chart
4 Fuse extractor
5 Spare fuses
287
Practical hints
Fuses
Auxiliary fuse box in front passenger
footwell
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the
front passenger compartment.
1 Lock
2 Cover
288
Removing/installing cover
왘
Turn both locks 1 90° counterclockwise.
왘
Remove cover 2 in direction of arrow.
왘
Install cover 2 in reverse order.
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
289
Technical data
Spare parts service
왔 Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts parts required for
maintenance and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz spare
parts should be installed.
290
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the “warranties” printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle
in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
291
Technical data
Identification labels
왔 Identification labels
i
When ordering spare parts, please
specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.
1 Certification label and Paintwork number
292
2 Engine number (engraved on engine)
3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
4 Emission control label
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
5 Information label, California version
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
293
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model
ML 350 (163.1571)
ML 500 (163.175)1
Engine
112
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
6
8
Bore
3.81 in (97.00 mm)
3.81 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
227 cu in (3724 cm )
303 cu in (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
232 hp/5750 rpm
(173 kW/5750 rpm)
288 hp/5600 rpm
(215 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
254 lb-ft/3000-4500 rpm
(345 Nm/3000-4500 rpm)
325 lb-ft/2700 rpm
(440 Nm/2700 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2370 mm
2370 mm
1
3
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
294
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
!
i
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A
tire inflation pressure table is located
on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The
tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on
cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s
maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.
Rims and tires
Model
ML 350
ML 500
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 17 H2
8 1/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
2.0 in (52 mm)
2.0 in (52 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)
255/60 R17 106 H
275/55 R17 109 V
1
Rims* (light alloy)
8 /2 J x 17 H2
8 1/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset*
1.85 in (47 mm)
1.85 in (47 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)*
275/55 R17 109 V
275/55 R17 109 V
295
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
Model
ML 350, ML 500
Rim
4 Jx18 H2 ET0
Wheel offset
0 in (0 mm)
Space-saver tire
T155/90 D18 113M1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
296
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model
ML 350
ML 500
Generator (alternator)
14 V/120 A
14 V/150 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F 8 DPP332
Bosch F 8 DPER
Bosch F 8 DPP332
Bosch F 8 DPER
Electrode gap
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque
15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
297
Technical data
Main Dimensions
왔 Main Dimensions
Model
ML 350, ML 500
Overall vehicle length
182.6 in (4638 mm)
Overall vehicle width
83.7 in (2126 mm)
Overall vehicle height
71.7 in (1820 mm)
Wheelbase
111.0 in (2820 mm)
Track, front
61.2 in (1555 mm)
Track, rear
61.2 in (1555 mm)
Ground clearance
8.03 in (204 mm)
Turning radius
468.5 in (11.9 m)
298
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Roof load max.
220 lbs (100 kg)
299
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Therefore use only brands tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
ML 350, ML 500
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Transfer case
1.6 US qt (1.5 l)
(Dexron 3 or Dexron 2E)
Rear axle
1.3 US qt (1.25 l)
(Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90)
Front axle
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
(Hypoid gear oil SAE 90)
Power steering
approx. 0.65 US qt (0.6 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs
approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each
High temperature roller bearing grease
Engine with oil filter
300
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Cooling system
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
ML 350, ML 500
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
22.0 US gal (83.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON
approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning
system*
1
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
8.0 US qt (7.6 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 307).
301
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved
engine oils is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
!
Always check the oil filler cap
(컄 page 221) for important information
pertaining to the engine oil needing to
meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is printed on the oil filler cap, only
use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that
meets the specification indicated on
the oil filler cap.
302
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Brake fluid
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Engine oil additives
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will provide you with additional information.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline additives
Use only premium unleaded meeting
ASTM standard D 439:
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
Do not blend other specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to the engine
operation.
303
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion / antifreeze, which provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
304
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in boil-over protection. Refer to Service Booklet for
replacement interval.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approx. - 22°F
[-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze
protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the
engine temperature will increase due to
the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service
life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for service.
305
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
ML 350, ML 500,
306
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system* are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
reservoir has a capacity of approx.
8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
For temperatures below freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
307
Technical data
Consumer information
왔 Consumer information
This has been prepared as required of all
manufacturers of passenger cars under
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
308
Tread wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straightahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
Warning!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
309
310
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp 7 in the instrument cluster
lights up). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
311
Technical terms
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
312
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the speedometer
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector
lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD or DVD digital
maps for navigation.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight
on each axle must never exceed the
GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located
on the driver’s door pillar.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare
wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo. The GVW must never
exceed the GVWR, indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s door pillar.
Technical terms
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door
pillar.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Line of fall
The direct line that an object moves
downhill when influenced by the force
of gravity alone.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
MCS
(Modular Control System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the radio and navigation system, as well as
for other optional equipment (CD
changer, telephone, etc.).
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
A display field in the instrument cluster
used to present information provided
by the control system.
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
313
Technical terms
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including
앫
engine
앫
clutch/torque converter
앫
transmission
앫
transfer case
앫
drive shaft
앫
differential
앫
axle shafts/axles
314
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Restraint system
Seat belts, belt tensioner, airbags and
child seat restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector lever from being moved out of position P
without key turned and brake pedal depressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Technical terms
Tele Aid System*
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
TWR
(Tongue Weight Rating)
The TWR is the maximum permissible
weight on the trailer tongue.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Transfer case
Speed of rotation/torque converter
that works together with the ->automatic transmission. In the LOW mode
off-road position, the transfer case decreases the output rotational speed of
the ->automatic transmission by approximately half. This results in a corresponding increase of torque on the
drive axles.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
The vehicle then has nearly double the
driving force but drives only approximately half as fast.
315
316
Index
A
ABS 25, 76, 311
ABS control 76
LOW RANGE mode 77
Malfunction indicator lamp 242
Warning lamp 242
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 123
Accident
In case of 52
Activating
Air circulation mode 139
Air recirculation mode 139
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Automatic climate control 135
ESP 82
Exterior headlamps 48
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 48
High beams 110
Ignition 33
Immobilizer 54, 83
Rear passenger compartment ventilation and climate control 141
Rear window defroster 133
Rear window wiper 51
Residual heat 140
Seat heater* 98
Tow-away alarm 85
Warning indicators (Parktronic*) 155
Windshield wipers 50
Activating automatic central locking 93
Adding
Coolant 223
Engine oil 221
Additional turn signals 266
Adjustable steering column
Indicator lamp 253
Adjusting 34
Backrest tilt 36, 38
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Head restraint height 36, 38
Head restraint tilt 37, 39
Headlamp aim 272
Instrument cluster illumination 116
Manual seat 35
Mirrors 40
Power seats* 37
Seat cushion tilt 38
Seat fore and aft 35
Seat fore and aft adjustment 37
Seat height 36, 38
Seats 34
Steering wheel 39
Adjusting air distribution
Automatic climate control 137
Adjusting air volume
Automatic climate control 137
Air conditioner (cooling)
Turning on 139
Air conditioning
Cooling 139
317
Index
Air conditioning refrigerant 302
Air outlets
Automatic climate control 142
Air pressure see Tire inflation
pressure 227
Air recirculation mode 138
Activating 139
Deactivating 139
AIRBAG OFF
Warning lamp 243
Airbags 59
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 311
BabySmartTM deactivation
system 70
Children 60
Front 63
Passenger 63
Safety guidelines 62
Side impact 64
Window curtain 64
318
Alarm
Audible 75, 84, 86
Canceling 84, 86
Visual 83
Alarm system
Anti-theft 83
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 305
Antiglare
Automatic 126
Antilock brake system (ABS) 311
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 83
Canceling alarm 84, 86
Disarming 84
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Immobilizer 83
Tow-away alarm, glass breakage
sensor 84
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 197
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 165
Storage spaces 165
Armrest in rear seat bench 167
Ashtray
Front center console 168
Rear center console 169
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 222
Attaching a trailer 208
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 126
Automatic central locking
Activating 93
Deactivating 93
Automatic climate control 134
Adjusting air distribution 137
Adjusting air volume 137
Air conditioning 139
Air outlets 142
Air recirculation mode 138
Basic setting 137
Changing basic setting 137
Defrosting 138
Economy mode 135
Index
Rear passenger compartment 141
Rear window defroster 133
Residual heat utilization 140
Residual ventilation 140
Switching off 137
Switching on 137
Automatic headlamp mode 108
Automatic interior lighting control
Activating 113
Deactivating 113
Automatic locking when driving 93
Automatic transmission 119
Accelerator position 123
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 124
Gear ranges 121
Gear selector lever position 122
Gear shifting malfunctions 124
Kickdown 123
Manual shifting 120
One-touch gearshifting 120
Selector lever position 119
Towing a trailer 124
Transmission fluid 222
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 70
Compatible child seats 70, 311
Self-test 70
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 311
Backrest tilt 35
Backup lamps 267, 270
Bulbs 267
BAS 78, 311
Malfunction indicator lamp 245, 246,
247
Warning lamp 245, 246, 247
Batteries, remote control
Changing 262
Batteries, vehicle 223
Battery discharged
Jump starting 281
Battery indicator lamp
Indicator lamp 254
Battery, vehicle 223, 278
Charging 279
Disconnecting 279
Reconnecting 279
Reinstalling 279
Removing 279
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 311
Blocking
Rear door window operation 73
Brake assist system (BAS) 311
Brake fluid 302
Brake lamp bulbs 267
Brake lamp, high mounted 267
Brake pad wear
Indicator lamp 254
Brakes 194
Warning lamp 244
Break-in period 192
319
Index
Bulbs, replacing 266
Additional turn signals 266
Backup lamps 267
Brake lamps 267
Fog lamps 266
Front fog lamp 270
Front lamps 266
High beam 266
High mounted brake lamp 267, 271
License plate lamps 267, 271
Low beam 266
Parking lamps 266, 267, 269
Rear fog lamp 267
Rear fog lamps 270
Rear side marker lamp bulbs 270
Side marker lamps 266, 267, 269
Standing lamps 266, 267
Tail lamp assemblies 267, 270
Turn signal lamps 266, 267, 269
320
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 311
Calibrating compass 188
California
Important notice 11
Calling up
Service indicator 233
CAN system 311
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 300
Cargo area cover blind* 161
Closing 161
Installing 162
Opening 161
Removing 161
Cargo area see Cargo compartment 89
Cargo compartment
Liftgate 89
Lighting 114
Tie-down rings 158
Cargo floor plates 162
Installing 163
Removing 162
Storing 162
Cargo tie-down rings 158
Catalytic converter 212
CD-changer* 258
Center console 27
Lower part 28
Upper part 27
Central locking
Automatic 93
From inside 93
Switch 94
Unlocking from inside 93, 94
Central locking switch 94
Certification label 292
Charge indicator lamp 254
Charging
Vehicle battery 279
Index
Chart
Fuses 287
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 248
Checking
Coolant level 215, 222
Oil level 218
Tire inflate pressure 216
Vehicle lighting 216
Checking weights
Trailer and vehicle 208
Checklist
Off-road driving 201
Returning from off-road driving 206
Child safety 67
Airbags 60
Infant and child restraint systems 64,
68
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
door window operation 73
Cigarette lighter
Front center console 168
Cleaning
Cup holder 238
Gear selector lever 238
Hard plastic trim items 238
Headlamps 131
Headliner 238
Instrument cluster 238
Leather upholstery 239
Light alloy wheels 238
MB Tex upholstery 239
Plastic and rubber parts 239
Seat belts 238
Steering wheel 238
Windows 237
Windshield 50
Wiper blades 237
Clock 26, 118
Closing
Glove box 164
Hood 218
Liftgate 92
Rear quarter windows* 147
Side windows 145
Sliding/pop-up roof* 148, 265
Closing sliding/pop-up roof*
In an emergency 265
Cockpit 22, 311
Combination switch
High beam flasher 49, 110
Turn signals 49
Windshield wipers 49
Compass 187
Calibrating 188
Setting compass zone 188
Compass zone 188
Consumer information 308
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 211
321
Index
Coolant 222, 304
Adding 223
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 304
Checking level 222
Indicator lamp 249
Temperature 213
Temperature gauge 117
Coolant level
Checking 215, 222
Crossing obstacles 204
Cruise control 150, 311
Canceling 151
Driving downhill 151
Driving uphill 151
Fine adjustment 152
LOW RANGE mode 152
Saving current speed 151
Setting speeds 152
Cruise control lever 150
322
Cup holder 166
Cleaning 238
In front seat armrest 167
In instrument panel 166
In rear centerconsole 167
Customer Assistance Center (CAC)
311
D
Daytime running lamp mode 109
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 139
Air recirculation mode 139
Alarm 84
Anti-theft alarm system 84
Automatic climate control 135, 137
Cruise control 151
Defrost 138
Engine 54
ESP 81
Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 111
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 54
Immobilizer 83
Rear passenger compartment ventilation and climate control 141
Rear window defroster 133
Residual heat 140
Seat heater* 98
Tow-away alarm 85
Tow-away alarm (vehicles with trip
computer*) 85
Tow-away alarm (vehicles without trip
computer*) 86
Deactivating automatic central
locking 93
Deep water see Standing water 200
Defogging
Windshield 138
Defrosting 138
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 51
With starting 47
Direction of rotation (tires) 227
Discharged battery
Jump starting 281
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 279
Display in the speedometer 117
Index
Display messages
Error 256
Service indicator (FSS) 256
StArt 256
Displays
Messages 219
Service indicator 232
Distance remaining 189
Door entry lamps 113
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 179
Doors
Opening from inside vehicle 90
Opening from outside 89
Downhill driving
Cruise control 151
Downshifting 120
Drink holder see Cup holder 167
Drinking and driving 193
Driving 42, 47
Abroad 211
In winter 198
Problems 51
Safety systems 76
Through standing water 200
Driving abroad 211
Driving instructions
Towing a trailer 209
Driving off 195
Driving safety systems
4-ETS 79
ABS 76
BAS 78
ESP 80
Driving systems 150
Cruise control 150
Driving safety systems 76
EBP 80
Parktronic* 153
Driving through water 203
E
Easy entry/exit feature* 101
EBP 80
Indicator lamp 245
Economy mode
Automatic climate control 135
Electrical connections
Trailer 207
Electrical fuses 287
Electrical outlet 170
Electrical system
Technical data 297
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors 128
Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 25,
80
Electronic stability program see ESP 312
Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS 25
Emergency call system
Requirements 172
Emergency call system* 172
323
Index
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 175
With Tele Aid* 173
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 124
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 265
Locking the vehicle 262
Opening sliding/pop-up roof* 265
Remote door unlock 179
Unlocking the vehicle 261
Emergency tensioning device see
ETD 67, 312
Emission control 212
Emission control label 292
Engine
Starting 46
Technical data 294
Turning off 54
Engine cleaning 236
324
Engine compartment
Fuse box in 287
Hood 217
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25,
248
Engine number 311
Engine oil 218, 302
Adding 221
Additives 302
Checking level 218
Consumption 218
Messages in display 219
Oil dipstick 221
Viscosity 312
Enlarged cargo area 99
Error
Display messages 256
ESP 25, 80, 312
LOW RANGE mode 81
Malfunction indicator lamp 245, 246,
247
Switching off 81
Switching on 82
Synchronizing 246
Warning lamp 245, 246, 247, 251
ETD 312
Safety guidelines 62
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 67
Exterior mirrors
Folding 128
Exterior rear view mirrors 40
Adjusting 40
Folding electrically 128
Index
F
Fastening the seat belts 42
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 152
First aid kit 257
Flat tire 274
Lowering the vehicle 276
Mounting the spare wheel 274
Preparing the vehicle 274
Spare wheel 259
Flexible Service System (FSS) 232, 312
Fluid level
Automatic transmission 222
Fog lamp, rear 267
Fog lamps 111
Replacing bulbs 266
Fog lamps, front
Replacing bulbs 267
Switching on 111
Folding
Exterior mirrors 128
Folding electrically
Exterior rear view mirrors
128
4-ETS 25, 79
Indicator lamp 252
LOW RANGE mode 80
Malfunction indicator lamp 252
Warning lamp 251
Front airbags 63
Front fog lamps
Indicator lamp 253
Front lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 268
Front towing eyes 285
FSS (Flexible Service System) 232, 312
Fuel 215
Additives 303
Fuel reserve warning lamp 252
Gasoline additives 303
Premium unleaded gasoline 215,
303
Requirements 303
Reserve warning 25
Fuel additives 303
Fuel filler flap 214
Locking 214
Opening 263
Unlocking 214
Fuel requirements 303
Fuel tank
Filler flap 214
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 300
Functions
Trip computer* 186
Fuse box 287, 288
Fuse chart 287
Fuses 287
Fuse box in engine compartment 287
Fuse box in passenger footwell 288
Fuse chart 287
Fuse extractor 287
Spare fuses 287
G
Garage door opener 29, 180
Erasing in remote control 185
Gasoline see Fuel 215
Gasoline additives 303
Gauge for
Coolant temperature 25
Fuel 25
Outside temperature 25
325
Index
Gear range 312
Automatic transmission 121
Limiting 121
Shifting into optimal 120
Gear range limit
Canceling 120
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 238
Position 122
Glass breakage sensor 84
Global Positioning System (GPS) 312
Glossary 311
Glove box 23, 164
Closing 164
Opening 164
Good visibility 126
GPS 312
326
H
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 238
Hazard warning flasher 112
Switching off 112
Switching on 112
Head restraints
Manual seats 36
Power seats* 38
Headlamp aim
Adjusting 272
Headlamp cleaning system* 224
Headlamps
Automatic control 108
Bi-Xenon* 311
Cleaning 236
Cleaning system* 131, 224
Refilling washer fluid 224
Switching off 54
Switching on 48
Washer fluid 307
Washer system 307
Headliner
Cleaning 238
Heated seats* 98
Height adjustment
Head restraints 36, 38
Seat belts 45
Steering wheel 39
High beam flasher 49, 110
High beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 269
Switching on 110
High mounted brake lamp 267
Replacing bulbs 271
Hood 217
Closing 218
Opening 217
Hooks
Loading 159
Hydroplaning 197
Index
I
Identification labels 292
Certification label 292
Vehicle identification number
(VIN) 292
Ignition 33
Immobilizer 83
Activating 54, 83
Deactivating 83
Indicator lamp
Adjustable steering column 253
Brake pad wear 254
Coolant 249
Front fog lamps 253
Low engine oil level 253
Indicators, additional
Speedometer display 256
Infant and child restraint systems 68
Installing 71
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 177
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 126
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 71
Wiper blades 273
Instrument cluster 24, 116, 313
Cleaning 238
Coolant temperature gauge 117
Display in the speedometer 117
Illumination 116
Lamps in 252
Outside temperature indicator 118
Instruments and controls see Cockpit 22
Integrated remote control
Erasing memory 185
Operating 185
Interior lighting 112
Activating automatic control 113
Deactivating automatic control 113
Manual operation 113
Reading lamps 114
Interior storage spaces 164
Armrest 165
Cup holder 167
Glove box 164
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 165
Storage compartment under front passenger seat* 164
Intermittent wiping 130
J
Jack 258
Jump starting
281
327
Index
K
Key
Global locking 89
Global unlocking 89
Loss of 90
Positions in steering lock 33
Remote control with folding key 88
Unlocking liftgate 89
Unlocking the driver’s door, fuel filler
flap 89
Key positions in steering lock 33
Key, Mechanical 261
Key, Remote control
Unlocking with 32
Kickdown 123, 313
L
Labels, identification 292
Lamp bulbs, exterior 266
Lamps, exterior
Front 266
Rear 267
328
Lamps, indicator and warning
4-ETS 251, 252
ABS 242
Adjustable steering column 253
AIRBAG OFF 63, 243
BAS 78, 245, 246, 247
Battery indicator lamp 254
Brake pad wear 254
Brakes 244
CHECK ENGINE 248
Coolant 249
EBP 245
Engine diagnostics 248
ESP 245, 246, 247, 251
Front fog lamps 253
Fuel reserve 252
Low engine oil level 253
LOW RANGE 252
Low washer system fluid level 253
Seat belts 253
Service indicator 232
SRS 255
Turn signals 25
LATCH child seat anchors 72
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 293
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 239
Lever
For cruise control 150
License plate lamps
Replacing bulbs 267, 271
Liftgate
Closing 92
Opening 89, 91
Opening from inside 91
Opening from outside 91
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 238
Lighter
Rear center console 169
Lighter see cigarette lighter 168
Index
Lighting 107
Automatic headlamp mode 108
Cargo compartment 114
Combination switch 110
Daytime running lamp mode 109
Door entry lamps 113
Front fog lamps 111
High beam flasher 110
High beams 110
Instrument cluster illumination 116
Interior 112
Locator lighting 110
Night security illumination 109
Limiting the gear range 121
Limp Home Mode 124
Line of fall 313
Loading 157
Cargo area cover blind* 161
Cargo floor plates 162
Cargo tie-down rings 158
Hooks 159
Instructions 157, 158
Partition net* 159
Roof rack 163
Split rear bench seat 99
Trailer 208
Locator lighting 110
Lock button 313
Locking 88
Automatic while driving 93
Centrally from inside 94
Fuel filler flap 214
Global 89
Vehicle in an emergency 262
Locking knobs 32
Loss of keys 90
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 291
Low beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 268
Switching on 48
Low engine oil level
Indicator lamp 253
LOW RANGE - 4-ETS 80
LOW RANGE - ABS 77
LOW RANGE - ESP 81
LOW RANGE mode 125
Low washer system fluid level
Indicator lamp 253
Lowering
Vehicle 276
M
Main dimensions 298
Maintenance 12
Display messages 256
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 263
Interior lighting control 113
Locking the vehicle 262
Sliding/pop-up roof* 265
Unlocking the driver’s door 261
Unlocking transmission selector
lever 264
329
Index
Manual seat
Adjusting 35
Adjusting backrest tilt 36
Adjusting head restraint height 36
Adjusting head restraint tilt 37, 39
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Seat height 36
MB Tex upholstery
Cleaning 239
MCS
Modular Control System 313
Mechanical key 261
Memory function 105, 313
Memory function* 106
Recalling positions from
memory 106
Mirror
Inside rear view mirror 40
330
Mirrors
Activating exterior mirror parking
position 127
Adjusting 40
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 126
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 106
MON 215
MON (Motor Octane Number) 313
Monitoring reach
Parktronic* 154
Multifunction display 313
N
Night security illumination 109
Deactivation temporarily 109
Setting time 109
O
Occupant safety 58
Children and airbags 60
Children in the vehicle 67
Fastening the seat belt 42
Infant and child restraint systems
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Seat belts 42, 62
Odometer display 117
Odometer, main 25
Off-road driving
Checklist 201, 206
Crossing obstacles 204
Driving instructions off-road
driving 200
Driving through water 203
Returning 205
Rules 201
Special driving features 201
Steep terrain 202
68
Index
Oil
Adding 221
Consumption 218
Dipstick 218
Oil dipstick 221
Viscosity 312
One-touch gearshifting 120
Canceling gear range limit 120
Downshifting 120
Upshifting 120
Opening
Doors from the inside 90
Fuel filler flap 214
Fuel filler flap manually 263
Glove box 164
Hood 217
Liftgate 89, 91
Liftgate from inside 91
Liftgate from outside 91
Rear quarter windows 146
Side windows 145
Sliding/pop-up roof* 148, 265
Sliding/pop-up roof* in an
emergency 265
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 166
Storage compartment under passenger
seat 165
Windows 145
Opening and closing
Side windows 144
Operating
Garage door opener 185
Integrated remote control 185
Radio transmitters 211
Vehicle outside the USA and
Canada 13
Operating safety 17
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 236
Outside temperature indicator 118
Overdue service 233
Overhead control panel 29
P
Paintwork 235
Panic alarm 75
Panic button on remote control 75
Parking and locking 53
Parking brake 47, 53
Engaging 53
Releasing 47
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269
Replacing the bulbs 269
Switching on 107
Parktronic* 153, 313
Cleaning system sensor 237
Monitoring reach 154
Sensor cover 237
Switching off 156
Switching on 156
Warning indicators 155
331
Index
Partition net* 159
Engaging 159
Removing 161
Tightening 160
Parts see Spare parts service
Passenger compartment 211
Interior lighting 112
Passenger footwell
Fuse box in 288
Passenger safety see Occupant
safety 58
Pedals 193
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 239
Poly-V-belt drive 314
Layout 293
Positions (Memory function*)
Recalling from memory 106
Storing into memory 106
Power assistance 193
332
Power seat*
Adjusting backrest tilt 38
Adjusting head restraint height 38
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 38
Adjusting seat height 38
Seat fore and aft adjustment 37
Power seats* 37
Power train 314
Power washer 235
Power windows
Blocking of rear door window
operation 73
Side windows 144
Synchronizing 146
Practical hints
First aid kit 257
Fuses 287
Lamps in instrument cluster 242
Spare wheel 259
Towing the vehicle 283
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicle tool kit 257
Premium unleaded gasoline 303
Problems
While driving 51
With vehicle 18
Product information 9
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control 182
R
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 211
Rain sensor* 130, 131
Rapid seat heating
Switching off 99
Rapid seat heating*
Switching on 98
Reading lamp 29
Index
Reading lamps 114
Rear automatic climate control 141
Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually 141
Automatic mode 141
Rear bench seat
Foldable 99
Rear door window
Blocking operation 73
Rear fog lamp 267
Bulb 267
Switching on 111
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 270
Rear parking lamp
Replacing bulbs 270
Rear passenger compartment ventilation
and climate control
Activating 141
Deactivating 141
Rear passenger compartment ventilation
and rear automatic climate
control 141
Rear quarter windows* 146
Opening 146
Closing 147
Rear seats 99
Easy entry/exit feature* 101
Enlarging cargo area 99
Folding down backrest 100
Folding up 101
Folding up backrest 100
Fore and aft 99
Lowering 100
Third row* 102
Rear standing lamp
Replacing bulbs 270
Rear towing eyes 285
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 126
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 133
Activating 133
Deactivating 133
Rear window wiper 131
Rain sensor* 131
Rear window wiper/washer 51
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 279
Refrigerant
Air conditioning 302
Refueling 214
Regular checks 215
Reinstalling vehicle battery 279
Remote control
Changing battery 262
Global locking 89
Global unlocking 89
Synchronizing 263
Unlocking liftgate 89
Unlocking the driver’s door, fuel filler
flap 89
Unlocking with 32
Remote control with folding key 88
333
Index
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 179
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 314
Removing
Vehicle battery 279
Wheel 276
Wiper blades 273
Removing spare wheel 259
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 270
Brake lamp bulbs 270
Bulbs 266
Front lamp bulbs 268
Front turn signal bulbs 268
Fuses 287
High beam bulbs 269
High mounted brake lamp 271
License plate lamp bulbs 271
Low beam bulbs 268
Rear fog lamp bulbs 270
Rear lamp bulbs 267, 270
Rear parking lamp bulbs 270
Rear side marker lamp bulbs 270
Rear standing lamp bulbs 270
Rear turn signal bulbs 270
Wiper blades 273
334
Replacing front fog lamp bulb 270
Reporting
Safety defects 19
Resetting
Service indicator (FSS) 233
Trip odometer 118
Residual heat utilization 140, 314
Residual ventilation 140
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 314
Restraint system 314
Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 68, 71
Returning from off-road driving 205
Rims 295
Roadside assistance 12
Tele Aid* 175
RON 215
RON (Research Octane Number) 314
Roof rack 163
Rotating wheels 228
Rubber parts
Cleaning 239
S
Safety
Occupant 58
Safety belts see Seat belts 42
Safety defects
Reporting 19
Safety systems
Driving 76
Saving current speed 151
Seat belt force limiter 67
Seat belt height adjustment 45
Index
Seat belts 64
Cleaning 238
Fastening 42
Height adjustment 45
Proper use of 44, 66
Safety guidelines 62
Warning lamp 253
Seat heater*
Switching off 98
Switching on 98
Seats 95
Adjusting 34
Heater* 98
Manual 35
Power 37
Rapid seat heating* 98
Rear 99
Split rear bench seat 99
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings 158
Selector lever 26
Lock 46
Position 26, 119
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 70
Tele Aid* 172
Service
Calling up the service indicator 233
Major service (Service B) 232
Minor service (Service A) 232
Overdue 233
Spare parts
Types 233
When due 232
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 291
Service and warranty information 10
Service indicator 232
Calling up 233
Clearing 232, 233
Service indicator (FSS)
Display messages 256
Service life (tires) 227
Service System see FSS
Setting
Cruise control 151
Higher speed in cruise control 152
Hours (clock) 118
Lower speed in cruise control 152
Minutes (clock) 118
Slower speed in cruise control 152
Speed in cruise control 152
Setting date
Trip computer* 186
Setting language
Trip computer* 190
Shift lock 314
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 122
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 120
Side impact airbags 64
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269
335
Index
Side windows 144
Automatic closing 145
Automatic opening 145
Cleaning 237
Closing 145
Closing fully (Express-close) 145
Opening 145
Opening and closing 144
Opening fully (Express-open) 145
Rear quarter window 146
Stopping 145
Synchronizing power windows 146
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Rear window wiper/washer 51
Windshield wipers 50
Single wipe 50
Sliding/pop-up roof* 148
Closing 148, 265
Opening 148, 265
Synchronizing 149
Snow chains 231
Spare fuses 287
Spare parts service 290
336
Spare wheel 259
Mounting 274
Removing 259
Speed
Saving current 151
Speed settings
Cruise control 152
Speedometer 25
Speedometer display
Additional indicators 256
Split rear bench seat 99
SRS 66, 314
Indicator lamp 255
Standing lamps 107
Replacing bulbs 266, 267
Standing water
Driving instructions 200
StArt
Display messages 256
Starting difficulties 47
Starting position 33
Starting the engine 46
Steep terrain
Driving 202
Steering column
Height adjustment 39
Length adjustment 39
Steering lock 23, 33
Positions 33
Steering wheel
Adjusting 39
Adjustment 39
Cleaning 238
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 180
Stop watch 189
Stopping
Windows 145
Storage compartments
Glove box 164
Under front passenger seat* 164
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 106
Stranded vehicle 286
Index
Sun visor 132
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 314
Switching off
Automatic climate control 137
ESP 81
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 54
Rapid seat heating 99
Transmission control – LOW RANGE
mode 125
Switching on
Automatic climate control 137
ESP 82
Front fog lamps 111
Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 111
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 48
High beams 110
Rapid seat heating* 98
Seat heating* 98
Transmission control – LOW RANGE
mode 125
Trip computer* 186
Windshield wipers 49
Synchronizing
ESP 246
Power windows 146
Remote control 263
Sliding/pop-up roof* 149
T
Tachometer 26, 118
Displaying gear range 121
Tail lamps 270
Cleaning 236
Replacing bulbs 267
Tar stains 235
Technical data 302
Brake fluid 302
Coolants 304
Electrical system 297
Engine 294
Engine oil 302
Engine oil additives 302
Fuel requirements 303
Gasoline additives 303
Main dimensions 298
Premium unleaded gasoline 303
Rims and tires 295
Weights 299
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 307
Tele Aid System* 315
337
Index
Tele Aid* 171
Emergency calls 173
Information 177
Initiating an emergency call
manually 175
Remote door unlock 179
Roadside assistance 175
Stolen vehicle tracking services 180
System self-check 172
Upgrade signals 178
Telematics* 315
Telephone* 170
Temperature
Grades of tires 309
Tires 228
Third row seats* 102
Folding down single seat 102
Installing single seat 104
Removing single seat 104
Storing single seat 103
Tie-down rings (Cargo
compartment) 158
338
Tightening torque 315
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 277
Tilt
Head restraint 37, 39
Time
Setting hours 118
Setting minutes 118
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 216, 227
Tire speed rating 198, 315
Tire traction 197
Tires 295, 308
Direction of rotation 227
Driving instructions 196
Retreads 226
Rims and tires 295
Rotating 228
Service life 227
Temperature 228
Temperature grades 309
Tread depth 230
Wear pattern 228
Winter 230
Tools 257
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicles with CD-changer* 258
Wheel bolt wrench 258
Tow-away alarm 29, 84
Arming 84
Disarming 84
Disarming for transport 84
Towing
Trailer 206
Towing a trailer 209
Automatic transmission 124
Towing eyes
Front 285
Rear 285
Towing the vehicle 283
Stranded vehicle 286
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 180
Index
Traction 308, 315
Trailer
Attaching 208
Loading 208
Towing 209
Trailer hitches 207
Trailer towing 206
Attaching a trailer 208
Checking weights 208
Electrical connections 207
Hitches 207
Loading 208
Weights and ratings 207
Trailer weights and ratings 207
Transfer case 315
Transmission control – LOW RANGE
mode 125
Switching off 125
Switching on 125
Transmission selector lever 264
Unlocking manually 264
Tread depth (tires) 230
Treadwear 308
Trip computer* 29, 186
Average fuel consumption 189
Compass 187
Country 190
Distance remaining 189
Language 190
Selecting functions 186
Setting date 186
Stop watch 189
Switching on 186
Trip odometer
Resetting 118
Trip odometer display 117
Trunk see Cargo compartment 89
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269
Turn signals 49
Additional in mirrors 266
Cleaning lenses 236
Front bulbs 266
Indicator lamps 25
Rear bulbs 267, 270
Turning off
Engine 54
U
Unlocking 32, 88
Centrally from inside 94
Driver’s door in an emergency 261
Driver’s door, fuel filler flap 89
Fuel filler flap 214
In an emergency 261
Transmission selector lever
manually 264
Vehicle in an emergency 179
With the remote control 32
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 178
Uphill driving
Cruise control 151
Upholstery
Cleaning 239
Upshifting 120
339
Index
Useful features 164
Ashtrays and cigarette lighter 168
Cup holder 166
Electrical outlet 170
Garage door opener 180
Interior storage spaces 164
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control 182
Tele Aid* 171
Telephone* 170
Trip computer* 186
V
Vehicle
Locking 28
Locking in an emergency 262
Lowering 276
Proper use of 17
Service battery 278
Towing 283
Unlocking 28
Unlocking in an emergency 261
Vehicle and trailer weights and
ratings 207
Vehicle battery 278
340
Vehicle care
Cup holder 238
Engine cleaning 236
Gear selector lever 238
Hard plastic trim items 238
Headlamps 236
Instrument cluster 238
Leather upholstery 239
Light alloy wheels 238
MB Tex upholstery 239
Ornamental moldings 236
Paintwork 235
Parktronic* system sensor 237
Plastic and rubber parts 239
Power washer 235
Seat belts 238
Steering wheel 238
Tail lamps 236
Tar stains 235
Turn signals 236
Upholstery 239
Vehicle washing 236
Window cleaning 237
Wiper blades 237
Vehicle identification number (VIN) 292
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicle lighting
Checking 216
Vehicle tool kit 257
Vehicle with CD-changer* 258
Vehicle washing 236
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 292,
315
Voice control system* 315
W
Warning indicators
Parktronic* 155
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 64
Parking brake 48
Warranty coverage 291
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 234
Index
Wear pattern (tires) 228
Weights 299
Wheel bolt wrench 258
Wheel change
Tightening torque 277
Wheels
Rotating 228
Window curtain airbags 64
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging 138
Refilling washer fluid 224
Replacing wiper blades 273
Washer fluid 224, 307
Washer system 307
Windshield washer fluid 307
Filler neck 224
Mixing ratio 307
Refilling 224
Wiping with 50
Windshield washer system 307
Windshield wipers 49, 129
Intermittent 49
Interval wiping 130
Normal wiper speed 49
Rain sensor* 130
Rear window wiper/washer 51
Replacing wiper blades 273
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Single wipe 50
Switching on 49
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 50
Winter driving
Snow chains 231
Tires 230
Winter driving instructions 198
Winter tires 230
51
Wiper blades
Cleaning 237
Installing 273
Removing 273
Replacing 273
Wiper switch 49
Wiper/washer
Rear window 51
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 50
Intermittent 49, 130
With windshield washer fluid 50
Wiping and washing simultaneously 51
X
Xenon headlamps*
Bi-Xenon* 311
341
342
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2273-31
Press time 08/20/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany